King KX170170A175175AKY195 Installation & Maintenance Manual
King KX170170A175175AKY195 Installation & Maintenance Manual
King KX170170A175175AKY195 Installation & Maintenance Manual
MANUAL
KX 17OA/B-KX175/B
NAV/COMM
TRANSCEIVER
KY 195/B
UNICATIONS
TRANSCEIVER
MANUAL NUMBEB 006-5053-06
REVISION NUMBER 6
1st PRINTING APRIL, 1971
Where R&R appears in the action column, remove the page now in the maintenance manual and
replace it with the enclosed page; otherwise, ADD or DESTROY pages as listed. Retain these
instructions in the front of the maintenaqce manual as a Record of Revisions.
Cover R&R Updated transmitter and audio assembly and schematic to latest revision
5-67A ADD
6-61 R&R
6-62 R&R
% RADIOMAINTENANCE MANUALREVISIONINSTRUCTIONSANDHISTORY
MANUAL KX liOA/175 - KX 171x1/1758 - KY 195/195B
REVISION 5, JUIY, 1976
Where R&Ii appears III the action column, remove the page now in the mamterlarlce manual and
replace It with the enclrlsed page; otherwise, ADD or DESTROY pages as llstetl. I~eta~n thesr
mstructions in the t’t.orlt of the maintenance manual as a Record of Revisions.
Installation
Remove Tabs and Text of First 3 Sections and Replace with New Install.
Installation
Remove Tabs and Text of First 3 Sections and Replace with New Install.
Remove lable of Contents.
Drawing Updated
(KX 170B/KX 1758)
Installation
New Revision
Contents Revised
Change in Para. 5.2.1(j)
Change in Para. 5.2.5.8(s)
K-I 674
PAGE WION REASON FOR CHAMGE I
K- I h
G RADIOMAlNTfNANCE
MANUAL
REVISION
INSTRUCTIONS
ANDHISTORV
MANUAL Kx 170 A/B - KX 175/B - KY 195/B
REVISION3 August 1973
Where R&R appears in the action column, remove the page now in the maintenance manual and
l replace it with the enclosed page; otherwise,
instructions in the front of the maintenance
ADD or DESTROY pages as listed.
manual as a Record of Revisions.
Retain these
PAGF
. ..-_ 1 ACTIIIY
..-. .-.. i RFASflY ,FflR l?HAUCP
..-..-w.. . . . . “..“l.W..
WhereR&R appears in the action column, remove the page now in the maintenance manual and
replace it with the enclosed page; otherwise, ADD or DESTROY pages as listed. Retain these
instructions in the front of the maintenance manual as a Record of Revisions.
Page 1 of 3
KING RADIO MAINTENANCE MANUAL REVISION INSTRUCTIONS AND HISTORY
Where R&R appears in the action column,remove the page now in the maintenance manual and
replace it with the enclosed page; otherwise, ADD or DESTROY pages as listed. Retain these
instructions in the front of the maintenance manual as a Record of Revisions.
-PA----Gl? I ACTTON
_-_ - --_. 1 REASON FOR CHANGE
Front Page Add (KX 170A/B-KX 175/B)(KY 195/B)
Front Page R&R To correspond with new revision
Warranty R&R To correspond with new revision
Record of
Revision Destroy Manual Format Change
Service
Bulletin
Record Destroy Manual Format Change
Manual Rev.
Instructions
& History Add Manual Format Change
Service
Bulletin &
Memo .Add Manual Format Change
Vi R&R Page numbers (Section VI) changed
l-2 R&R Word “OPTIONAL” added
l-9 R&R Word change
1-12 R&R Deletion of information
2-13 Add Interconnect updated
2-13A Add Interconnect updated
2-i5 Add Interconnect updated
2-17 Add Interconnect updated
4-19 R&R Figure 4 - 12 changed
4-22 R&R Figure 4-15 changed
4-23 R&R Figure 4- 17 changed
4-26 R&R Figure 4-21 changed
4-27 R&R Figure 4-22 changed
5-1 R&R Test equipment updated
5-2 R&R Information deleted
5-3 R&R Information change
5-4 R&R Information deleted
5-5 R&R Information change
5-37 R&R Table 5-7 updated
5-40 R&R Table 5-8 updated
5-42 R&R Table 5-9 updated
5-59 R&R Schematic updated
5-91 R.R R Table 5-13 updated
5-95 R&R Paragraph 5. 7.4 updated
5-106 R&R Paragraph d. updated
5-107 R&R Table 5-14 updated
5-111 R&R Paragraph 5.8.4 updated
5-113 R&R Schematic updated
L
Page 2 of 3
PAGE I ACTION 1 REASON FOR CHANGE
j-116 R&R Photo updated
j-125 R&R Schematic updated
j-139
:hru
j- 149 Add Schematics updated
Section VI
Tab R&R Contents updated
3-l
ru
10 R&R Parts list updated
15
RI
24 R&R Parts list updated
29
K-U
36 R&R Parts list updated
41
ru
75 R&R Parts list updated
ction V
rb R&R Contents updated
ction V R&R Parts list updated, parts list revision record pages inserted,
remove and replace entire section.
Add Interconnect updated
Add Schematic updated
CU
R&R Parts list & Assembly drawings updated
Idendum Add New (KX 170B/KX 175B/KY 195B) Maintenance Manual
Page 3 of 3
KING,
KX 17OA/KX175
NAVIGATION
RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSCEIVER
INSTALLATION
MANUAL
006-0057-03
TABLEOFCONTENTS
SECTION
I
Paragraph
GENERAL
INFORMATION Page
1.1 Introduction l-l
1.2 Purpose of Equipment l-l
1.3 Design Features l-l
1.4 Power Requirements l-3
Technical Characteristics l-3
::6" Units and Accessories Supplied 1-12
1.7 Accessories Required, But Not Supplied 1-13
1.8 License Requirements 1-14
SECTION
II
INSTALLATION
2.1 General 2-l
2.2 Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment 2-l
2.3 KX 170A/KX 175 Installation 2-l
2.4 KX 39 Installation 2-2
2.5 KI 201C/KI 211C Installation 2-2
2.6 Antenna Installation 2-3
2.7 Cabling 2-4
SECTION
Ill
OPERATION
3.1 General 3-l
3.2 KX 170AjKX 175 NAV/COMM Controls 3-1
3.3 KI 201C/KI 211C Indicator Control and Function 3-3
3.4 KI 201C/KI 211C Operation 3-4
3.5 Post-Installation Checkout 3-5
KlNG
KX 17OAjKX 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
HISTORYOF REVISIONS
ii
Kx mix 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
SECTION
I
GENERAL
INFORMATION
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains information relative to the physical, mechanical and electrical
characteristics of the King Radio Corporation Silver Crown Kx 170A/KX 175, KI 201C
and KI 211C and interconnect information for various NAV/ COMM system options.
1.2 PURPOSE
OFEQUIPMENT
The King KX 170A/KX 175 NAV/COMM combines in a single panel mounted unit a 360
channel VHF COMM Transceiver and an independent 200 channel VHF NAV receiver.
The NAV Receiver supplies VOR/LOC information to navigational converters and
provides frequency selection for remote mounted Distance Measuring Equipment and
Glideslope Receivers.
The KI 201C VOR Indicator is designed to operate with VHF navigational equipment
(such as the KX 170A) to provide OMNI (VOR) or LOCALIZER (LOC) information.
The VHF navigational receiver receives and detects the omni or localizer information.
The KI 201C converts this information to dc signals which drive the LEFT-RIGHT
needle and the TO-OFF-FROM flag of the visual indicator.
The KI 211 C ILS Indicator performs the same functions as the KI 201C. In addition,
it contains a glideslope receiver and the visual indicator includes an UP-DOWN
glideslope needle with an OFF warning flag.
1.3 DESIGNFEATURES
1. 3. 1 KX 170A/KX 175
A. Controls
2. Separate NAV and COMM ON-OFF switches (KX 175 NAV and COMM
are electrically independent).
B. Electronics
C. Construction
1. 3. 2 KI BOlC/KI 211C
A. Solid state
1.4 POWER
REQUIREMENTS
The Kx 170A/KX 175 requires 13. 75 volts for proper operation. Aircraft having
electrical power plants producing 27. 5 volts require the installation of a voltage
converter. The KA 39 Voltage Converter, designed to separately-convert NAV
and COMM 27. 5 volts to 13. 75 volts, may be conveniently remote mounted in the
aircraft.
The KI 2OlC/211C may be operated from either a 27. 5 or 13. 75 volt aircraft supply
volt age.
1.5 TECHNICAL
CHARACTERISTICS
KX 170A TRANSCEIVER
SPECIFICATION 3HARACTERISTIC I
GE RAL
SIZE:
COMM TRANSCEIVER
TRANI lIITTER
REC IVER
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
NAV RECEIVER
SENSITIVITY:
Navigation 1. 5pv (soft) will provide a half-flag indicat ion
1. Opv (soft) will provide a 6db signal + nois 6
noise
ratio.
~~
SPECIFICATION 1-- CHARACTERISTIC
DME CHANNELING:
MO Ml M2 M3 Kg Kl K2 K3 50kHz
108 - - 0 - .0x 0 0 - - . x0
109 - - - 0 .1x 0 0 0 - . x5 0
110 0 - - - .2x 0 0 0 0
111 0 0 - - .3x - 0 0 0
112 0 0 0 - .4x - - 0 0
113 - 0 0 0 .5x 0 - - 0
114 0 - 0 0 .6X - 0 - -
115 - 0 - 0 .7x - - 0 -
116 0 - 0 - .8X - - - 0
117 0 0 - 0 .9x 0 - - -
GLIDESLOPE CHANNELING:
GS GS GS GS GS GS GS GS GS GS
108 109 110 111 0. 1 0. 3 0. 5 0. 7 0. 9 50kHz
108 0 - - - .0x - - - - - .x0 -
109 - 0 - - .1x 1 - - - - .x5 0
110 - - 0 - .2x - - - - -
111 - - - 0 .3x - 1 - - -
112 - - - - .4x - - - - -
113 - - - - .5x - 1 - -
114 - - - - .6X - - - - -
115 - - - - .7x - - - 1 -
116 - - - - .8X - - - - -
117 - - - - .9x - - - - 1
NOTE: (0) = ILS common, (-1 = open, (1) = either KN 70 A+ (KN 70 Installations)
or KX l’IOA/KX 175 A+ with 1KR source resistance (KI SllC/KI 212 1
SPECIFICATION ICHARACTERISTIC
AI 110
AUXILARY AUDIO INPUTS: Three (3) 500 ohms with 30db isolation be-
tween any two.
TSO COMPLIANCE:
Environmental DAPBAAXXXXXX
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
NAV RECEIVER
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
SENSITIVITY:
DME CHANNELING:
MO Ml Kg :1 K2 K3 50kHz
108 - - .0x0 -- . x0 1
109 - - - 0 .1x 0 0 0 - .x5 0
110 0 - - - .2x 0 0 0 0
111 0 0 - - .3x - 0 0 cl
112 0 0 0 - .4x - - 0 0
113 - 0 0 0 .5x 0 - - 0
114 0 - 0 0 .6X - 0 - -
115 - 0 - 0 .7x - - 0 -
116 0 - 0 - .8X - - - 0
117 0 0 - 0 .9x 0 - - -
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
GLIDESLOPE CHANNELING:
GS GS GS GS GS GS GS GS GS GS
108 109 110 111 0, 1 0. 3 0. 5 0. 7 0. 9 50kHz
108 0 - - - -ox - - - - - .x0 -
109 - 0 - - .1X 1 - - - - .x5 0
110 - - 0 - .2x - - - - -
111 - - - 0 .3x - 1 - - -
112 - - - - .4X - - - - -
113 - - - - .5x - - 1 - -
114 - - - - .6X _ _ _ - _
115 - - - - .7x - - - 1 -
116 - - - - .8X _ _ _ _ _
117 - - - - .9x - - - - 1
NOTE: (0) = ILS common, (-) = open, (1) = either KN 70 A+ (KN 70 Installations
or KX 170A, KX 175 A+ with 1KR source resistance (KI ZllC/KI 212
installations).
I
AUDIO
A.UXILARY AUDIO INPUTS: Three (3) 500 ohms with 30db isolation be-
tween any two.
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
GE <RAL
SIZE:
WEIGHT:
POWER REQUIREMENTS:
VOI rLOC
LOCALIZER SENSITIVITY: 4db tone ratio will give 4 dot scale deflection
f two needle widths
OMNI ACCURACY:
GLID SLOPE
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
KA 39 VOLTAGE CONVERTER
POWER: A B
Input Volts 27. 5vdc 27. 5vdc
output Volts 13. 75vdc 13. 75vdc
(nominal) (nominal)
Input Current continuous
Input Current 40% duty ------__
Output Current continuous 1. 5A 0. 75A
Output Current 40% duty 5. OA -------_
1.6
A. King KX 170A NAV/COMM (069-1017-00)
1.7 ACCESSORIES
REQUIRED,
BUTNOTSUPPLIED
1.8 LICENSE
REQUIREMENTS
The Federal Communications Commission requires that the operator of the transmitter
in this equipment holds a Restricted Radio Telephone Operator Permit, or higher class
license. A permit may be obtained by a U. S. citizen from the nearest field office of the
F-CC; no examination is required.
This equipment has been type accepted by the FCC and entered on their list of type
accepted equipments as King KX 17OA/ KX 175 and must be identified as King KX 170A
or King KX 175.
-CAUTION -
SECTION
II
INSTALLATION
2.1 GENERAL
This section contains suggestions and factors to consider before installing the KX 170A/
KX 175 NAV/COMM unit, KA 39 Voltage Converter (27. 5V installations only), and
KI 20 1C /KI 2llC Indicator. Close adherence to these suggestions will assure a more
satisfactory performance from the equipment.
2.2 UNPACKING
ANDINSPECTING
EQUIPMENT
Exercise extreme care when unpacking each unit. Make a visual inspection of each unit
for evidence of damage incurred during shipment. If a claim for damage is to be made,
save the shipping container to substantiate the claim. When all equipment is removed,
place in the shipping container all packing materials for use in unit storage or reship-
ment. The KX 170A/KX 175 installation will conform to standards designated by the
customer, installing agency and existing conditions as to unit location and type of install-
ation.
(4 The KX 170A/KX 175 is mounted rigid in the aircraft panel. Mark and cut the
mounting hole as shown in Figure 2-7. The purpose of the “behind aircraft panel
mount cutout is to allow a margin of error in cutout size and prevent the mount-
ing tray front edge from being visible. The mounting tray bottom lip should ex-
tend through the mounting hole flush with the instrument panel to insure proper
plug pin engagement.
(b) Avoid mounting close to any high external heat source. If this is done, no blower
or ram air cooling will be required. For blower or Ram Air cooling see
Figures 2-11 and 2-12.
(c) Remember to allow adequate space for installation of cables and connectors.
(4 Secure the mounting rack to instrument panel per Figure 2-7. The rear mount-
ing bosses should be attached to the airframe by means of support brackets.
(e) Slide the KX 17OA/KX 175 into the rack and secure by turning locking screw on
the front panel.
-CAUTlON-
Each KX 170A/KX 175 installation kit contains a locking bar (KPN 047-1720-OO),
bracket (KPN 047-1721-00) and two rivets (KPN 092-5021-00). These may be
installed at customer’s option to provide a means of locking the radio to the in-
strument panel with a padlock located on the lower rear corner of the mounting
tray.
(a) Select the KA 39 location considering good thermal conductivitv to the airframe,
convenient cable routing, proximity to the KX 17OA/KX 175 and separation from
other heat sources.
(b) Refer to Figure 2-5 for the KI 201C /211C mounting dimensions.
(e) The installing agency will supply and fabricate the external cable. The plugs
required are supplied by King Radio.
An omni error adjust potentiometer, R316, is accessible from the front of the
indicator by removing the OBS knob. This is for final calibration of the omni
system after installing in aircraft. The range of the error pot is approximately
f5”. It should be noted that this potentiometer does not affect localizer center-
ing.
2.6 ANTENNA
INSTALLATION
(4 Conventional 50 ohm horizontally polarized NAV and vertically polarized COMM
antennas are required with the KX 170A/KX 175. Vertical bent whip antennas
are not recommended. Wideband COMM antennas (KA 3 1 and KA’ 3 1A) provide
efficient operation over the COMM band. Antennas should be installed per manu-
facturers recommendations. Additional recommendations are as follow:
COMM ANTENNA
2. The antenna should be well removed from any projections and the
engine(s) and propeller.
NAVANTENNA
1. The location should be well removed from other antenna, projections and
engine(s) . It should have a clear line of sight area if possible.
3. Avoid running other coaxial cables and wires with the NAV antenna cable.
(b) The antenna connectors on the KX 170A/KX 175 unit are identified on the rear
die casting.
-NOTE-
-CAUTION -
(c) Refer to Figure 2-4 for a dual omni antenna installation if two navigation receiv-
ers are used. VOR antenna duplexers normally cause a 3db signal loss.
(d) Refer to Figure 2-2 for the COMM and NAV antenna cable connector assembly.
Solder tack the snap on shield to the connector base at two points to insure that
a good electrical ground is made.
2.7 CABLING
(4 The length and routing of the external cables must be carefully studied and plann-
ed prior to installation. Avoid sharp bends and placing cables too near the air-
craft control cables.
(b) Fabricate the external cables in accordance with the installation drawing that
fulfills the system requirement.
-NOTE-
(c) Since other radio and navigation equipment will possibly utilize the same speaker
circuits for muting, speaker selection and microphone switching must be devised
by the installing agency. The KX 170A/KX 175 does not shunt the speaker line of
other equipment when the off-on-test switch is turned “off”.
696-6002-00 (R-01
/SOLDER
Push braid forward and flatten against con-
nector cap and solder.
Solder tat connector cap to connector in at
least two places to insure good electrical
contact.
696-6003-00
FIGURE 2-2 ANTENNA CABLE ASSEMBLY
7 Trim
or
braid
insulation
but not
back
center
0.25”.
conductor
696-6004-00
696-6005-00
.093R 2 PLCS.
NOTES:
1. ALL 01~ENsl0Ns IN PARENTHESIS ARE INCENTIMETERS.
2.WEIGHT: I.1 Ibs
3 TERMINALS WILL TAKE 16 TO22AWG WIRE.
4.TERMlNALS ARE =5-40X1/4 60 HO SCREWS
I-
I -
WARNING
155-5076-00 (R- )
FIGURE 2-6 KA 39
VOLTAGE CONVERTER OUTLINE AND MOUNTING DRAWING
6. IO0
115.50)
I
:iii
09
CUTOUT
FRONT
D~~msms
AIRCRAFT PANEL
FOR
YDUNl
-.2lB c.551
(LOCKING
DIA. I PLC.
PIN HOLE)
N!!
LL - 1.03”
(4.19)
II.J””
(29.211
LONG LOCKING BAR
T - IBAR MAYBE CUT TO DESIRED LENGTH)
.437 10.000 047-1720-01
(I.1 I) (25.40 I
- SHORT LOCKING BAR
047-1720-00
NOTES:
I DlMENSlONS IN PARENTHESIS ARE IN CENTIMETERS I k .I87 t.47) DIA., 6 PLACES
I-L
:-I
y
-047-1721-00
ANTI-THEFT
CUSTOMER
PADLOCK
BRACKET
SUPPLIED
2. WEIGHT: 69LBS
- t
c” -- --
r XX --P-Y)\YX- r-lnmtt-
----
r yzu Inal 1
--- --pcv)m
r XX 1
I -bcm I
XX -boa\xx -~ln\xx-~0om\YX-~uxn
l- ------~--~---~~~ -I
l FIGURE 2-10 NON-TSO’D SILVER CROWN SYSTEM INTERCONNECT
(Dwg. No. 155-1090-00 R-8)
Rev. 3, January, 1976 Page 2-17
KX 170A/KX 175
KlNG
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
~ ,, 5oo -i- ,,.375 DIA. HOLE 30 PLCS. ,/I30 DIA. HOLE 4 PLC;
NO1 ‘E 2
7 2.500
3.000
Al-
.
NOTE NOTES:
l 3.000 -7000 I 1
I. MAKE ONE OF EACH PART SHOWN.
. 9.000
2. POP RIVET TOGETHER 6 PLCS.
. 11.000 I
3. POP RIVET RAM AIR TUBE TO DIFFUSER
HOUSING.
4. DUCK TAPE ALL SEAMS OF DIFFUSER.
AND SEAL IN TUBE.
5. THE LENGTH OF DIFFUSER, AND NUMBER
r.625 DIA. HOLE PART A
OF HOLES. DEPENDS ON THE HEIGHT OF
RADIO STACK OR AIRCRAFT PANEL.
DUCK.
TAPE
--
A I m A
/r Y
'I
.I30 DIA. HOL E/
4 PLCS I
.I26 DIA. HOLE
4 PLCS
FINAL ASSY.
‘NOTES 3 84
R4RT B
I !
+
625
, PANEL
AJRCRAFT-
SKIN
047-1146-00
KX 1758
DUCT, TUBING
150-0063-00
VIEW B
SECTIONIII
OPERATION
3.1 GENERAL
All controls required to operate the KX 170A/KX 175 and the KI 201C/211C are located
on the unit front panels.
The ON-OFF-TEST control is located directly above the COMM channel selector.
Power is supplied to the COMM when this control is either in the ON or TEST position.
The TEST position is used to defeat the COMM automatic squelch for both test purposes
and listening to extremely weak signals.
The Volume (VOL) control, located on the lower left side of the KX 170A/KX 175 is
used to adjust the transceiver audio volume. The KX 170A/KX 175 system power ON/
OFF switch is independent of this control, allowing the COMM volume to remain at a
desired preset level.
The two concentric knobs under the COMM frequency window are used to dial COMM
frequencies. The larger knob selects MHz and the smaller knob selects kHz. The
transceiver is inoperable in the two unused MHz positions between 118MHz and 135MHz.
Clockwise rotation selects higher frequencies. The dial mechanism has no stops, per-
mitting continuous rotation.
The OFF-VOICE-IDENT control is located directly above the NAV channel selector.
Power is supplied to the NAV when this control is either in VOICE or IDENT position.
NAV operation is independent of COMM. With- the switch on IDENT, the ground station
voice and identification tone are coupled to the aircraft speaker and/or headphone cir-
cuitry. With the switch on VOICE the identification tone is eliminated, permitting the
pilot to monitor the VOR ground station for voice transmissions without receiving the
VOR ident tone.
The navigation receiver volume (VOL) control, on the right side of the KX 170A/
KX 175, is used to control the level of the audio and/or identification tone output from
the navigation receiver. This control is also independent of the system power switch
allowing the NAV volume to remain at a desired preset level.
The two concentric knobs under the NAV frequency window are used to dial NAV freq-
uencies. The larger knob selects MHz and the smaller knob kHz. Clockwise rotation
selects higher frequencies. Remote DME, Glideslope, and ILS channeling are also
performed by this control.
The Omni Bearing Selector knob rotates the azimuth card on which the desired course
is selected. The course selected serves as a reference for all VOR indications.
The VOR/LOC deviation needle indicates the direction and amount of deviation from the
selected VOR course or localizer path. The angular deviation is toward the proper
flight path in normal operation.
The VOR/LOC warning flag is fully visible when the VOR or LOC signal is unreliable.
The VOR TO/ FROM flag indicates the direction “to” or “from” the VOR station.
The glideslope deviation needle indicates the direction and amount of deflection from
the glide path. The deflection is toward the direction of flight required to maintain
the proper decent path. The glideslope warning flag is visible when the glideslope
signal is unreliable or the receiver has malfunctioned.
COURSE INDEX
I V OR i LOC
.~ARNING
FLAG
GLIDE SLOPE
WARNING FLA .G VOR/LO(‘
-DEVIATION
INDICATOR
GLIDE SL .OPE
DEVIATI( )N INDICATOR
\TO- FROM
FLAG
OMNI
BEARING
SELECTOR 696-6007-00
Page 3-3
KING
KX 170A/KX 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
3.4 KI 201C/KI211COPERATION
3.4.1 VOR OPERATION
Select the desired VOR station frequency with the NAV frequency controls. The NAV
receiver volume control can then be adjusted to positively identify the station or listen to
FSS reports.
To intercept a selected VOR radial (from the station) and fly outbound, turn the OBS
control to set the desired radial under the top indicator index. Maneuver the aircraft
to fly the selected radial magnetic heading plus a 45” intercept angle which will provide
a sufficient intercept angle. The intercept angle should be reduced as the deviation
needle approaches an on course condition (center) to prevent excessive course bracket-
ing.
To determine the bearing and fly “to” a selected VOR station, turn the OBS control until
the “To-From” flag indicates “To” and the deviation needle is centered. Read the “to”
bearing under the top indicator index and maneuver the aircraft to approximately fly the
magnetic course “to” the station. If the deviation needle moves to the right, the aircraft
course must be adjusted 5 or 10 degrees to the right. Similarly, if the deviation needle,
goes to the left, the aircraft course must be adjusted to the left. Maintaining a centered
deviation needle will provide automatic course compensation for wind drift.
While flying a selected VOR course often times it can be noted that the deviation needle
moves erratically about the center or moves a few degrees to one side and eventually
returns to center. This action is refered to as VOR scalloping or course bends.
Scalloping is generally caused by irregularities in terrain and metal objects located near
the VOR station. Scalloping is more noticable at lower altitudes and in any case should
be ignored.
Aircraft position can be easily determined by consecutively selecting two VOR stations
and determining the “from” radial. By projecting appropriate radial lines from the VOR
station the aircraft location may be identified as the intersection of the two radial lines.
Localizer circuits are automatically energized when an ILS frequency is selected on the ’
KX 170A/KX 175 NAV receiver. By adjusting the NAV volume level the localizer station
can be identified and in some cases ATIS information received. The localizer flag
should disappear from view indicating the signal is reliable.
Maneuver the aircraft to fly an on course centered needle. While flying a front course
approach or out bound on the back course approach, magnetic heading corrections are
made toward the needle deflection. Similarly, while flying the back course approach
or outbound on the front course approach, corrections are made away from the needle
deflection.
The localizer course width is narrow compared to VOR course width and requires much
smaller course corrections to center the deviation needle. When intercepting the
localizer course, the aircraft turn into the localizer course should be started when the
needle moves off the meter stop.
A helpful quick reference reminder of the localizer course is to set the course on the
Omni bearing readout.
The glideslope (horizontal) needle provides the pilot vertical steering information
during ILS approaches. The glideslope circuitry is energized when the associated
localizer frequency is selected on the navigation receiver, observe that the glideslope
warning flag is concealed. The glideslope needle deflects toward the direction the
pilot must fly to remain on the glideslope. If the glideslope needle deflects upward the
aircraft is below the glideslope and must climb to center the needle. If the needle
deflects downward the aircraft is above the glide path and must descent to remain on
the glide path. When the needle is centered the aircraft is on the glide path.
3.5 POST-INSTALLATION
CHECKOUT
An operational performance flight test is recommended after the installation is com-
pleted to insure satisfactory performance of the equipment in its normal environment.
To check the VOR/ILS System select a VOR frequency within a forty nautical mile range.
Listen to the VOR audio and insure that no electrical interference such as magneto noise
is present. Check the tone identifier filter operation. Fly inbound or outbound on a
selected VOR radial and check for proper LEFT-RIGHT and TO-FROM indications.
Check the VOR accuracy.
-NOTE-
At low altitudes VOR ground station
scalloping may be present.
Flight test the ILS operation by flying a simulated ILS approach. Check localizer
LEFT-RIGHT deflection and, if applicable, glideslope deflection. Check the localizer
accuracy in relation to the ILS runway. Check the glideslope accuracy in relation to
the published ILS approach altitude.
MAINTENANCE/OVERHAUL
MANUAL
KX 17OA/KX175
NAV/COMM
TRANSCEIVER
TABLEOF CONTENTS
Paragraph Page
SECTIONIV THEORY
OFOPERATION
4 General 4-1
SECTIONV MAINTENANCE
5. 1 Test Equipment 5-l
TABLEOFCONTENTS
Paragraph Page
SECilONVI ILLUSTRATED
PARTSLIST
Item Page
ii
KX 1TN)
01 !+X 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
TABLEOFCONTENTS
Figure Page
iii
KI G
KX 170A 7 KX 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
TABLEOFCONTENTS
Figure Page
5-17 Voltage Translator 5-49
5-18 Programmable Divider 5-51
5-19 NAV Low Ref. Osc. /Programmable Div. /Phase and Frequency
Comparator 5-55
5-20 VCO Buffer 5-59
5-21 NAV High Ref. Osc. , Implicit i 2 Circuit, 2nd Mixer, Mixer Low
Pass Filter, Squaring Amplifier 5-62
5-22
5-23 Low Ref. Oscillator output 5-66
5-24 ‘Mixer Output 5-67
5-25 Squaring Amplifier Output 5-68
5-26 Programmable Divider Output 5-69
5-27 Voltage Translator 5-70
5-28 Programmable Divider 5-72
5-29 COMM Programmable Divider/Phase and Frequency Comparator 5-75
5-30 COMM Voltage Controlled Oscillator/VCO Low Pass Filter/25 KHz
Voltage Translator /VCO Buffer /Transmit Buffer /Transmit Enable
.Switch Out-of-Lock Transmit Disable 5-79
5-31 C OMM High Reference Oscillator/Implicit t 2 Circuit / 2nd Mixer /
Mixer Low Pass Filter /Squaring Amplifier 5-83
5-32 Timing Diagram Programmable Divider 5-85
5-33 Timing Diagram Phase and Frequency Comparator 5-87
5-34 AGC Amplifier DC Characteristics 5-89
5-35 Detector Setup 5-90
5-36 NAV Preselector/RF Amplifier/lst Mixer/lst IF. 5-94
5-37 NAV 2nd Local Oscillator, 2nd Mixer, and 2nd IF 5-98
5-38 NAV DET. /Noise Limiter/AGC Amplifier/Ident. Filter and Audio
Amplifier \ 5-102
5-39 AGC Amplifier DC Characteristics 5-105
5 -40 Detector Test Setup 5-106
5-41 COMM Preselector, R. F. Amplifier, 1st Mixer and 1st I. F. 5-110
5-42 COMM 2nd L. 0. , 2nd Mixer, 2nd I. F. and Detector 5-113
5-43 NAV Detector /Noise Limiter /AGC Amplifier Audio Preamplifier 5-116
5 -44 COMM Squelch Gate, Noise Amplifier and Filter, Carrier to Noise
Squelch and Carrier Squelch 5-121
5-45 Summing Junction, T-R Diode Switch, Audio Pre-Driver, Audio
Driver, Audio Output Amplifier 5-125
5-46 Final Amplifier 5-129
5-47 Regulators 5-132
5 -48 NAV Block Diagram 5-135
iv
KING
KX 170A/KX 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
TABLEOFCONTENTS
Figure Page
TABLES
No. Page
V
KX 17%!l!l 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
TABLEOFCONTENTS
Figure Page
vi
KING
KX 170A/KX 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
The information in this maintenance manual does not profess to include all the details
of design, production, or variations of the equipment, or to cover all the possible
contingencies which may arise during operation, installation, or maintenance. Should
special problems arise or further information be desired, please contact the KING
Customer Service Department.
vii
KX 17OyE 175
NAVIGATION REC EIVE R /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
viii
Ki
KX 170A KX 175
NAVIGATION
7G
RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
SECTION
IV
THEORY
OFOPERATION
4.1 GENERAL
The KX 170A/KX 175 unit incorporates a 200 channel navigation receiver, a 360 channel
communications transceiver and a 5 watt audio system. The KI 20 1C is an OMNI/ LOC
converter and indicator. The KI 211C includes the KI 201C capability plus a 20 channel
glideslope receiver with indicator. The KA 39 is a dual series regulator, Zeparately
converting 27. 5VDC to 13.75VDC for the COMM and NAV.
For discussion purposes, the KX 170A/KX 175 system is split into subsystems and
treated on the basis of block diagram theory and detailed circuit theory. Subsystems
are defined as Frequency Synthesizers (COMM and NAV), COMM Transceiver, NAV
Receiver and KA 39 Voltage Converter.
4.2 FREQUENCY
SYNTHESIZERS
0 4. 2. 1 SMO BLOCK DIAGRAM
The KX 17OA/KX 175 uses a stabilized master oscillator (SMO) for frequency generation.
A feedback loop is used to slave a voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) to the seiected
multiple frequency of a crystal controlled reference oscillator. The simplified block
diagram of Figure 4-l illustrates the principle of operation of the COMM SMO and NAV
Sxif ).
‘i‘he \/CO output frequency is divided by two, mixed with the High Frequency Crystal
<>scillator, divided by N, and compared in frequency and phase with the Low Frequency
Crystal Oscillator. The filtered error signal biases the VCO. The error signal is a
5 high voltage when the VCO frequency is low and a low voltage when the VCO frequency
is above the desired frequency. According to the VCO transfer function (Figure 4 -2b)
this error signal drives the VCO toward the selected frequency. When the VCO gets
within t400KIIz of the desired frequency, the loop captures the VCO and pulls it into
phase lock (fVC0 =f selected). In this condition the loop establishes an error signal
that is a 25KHz square wave. The low pass filter recovers the dc component and biase,:
the VCO to maintain the selected output frequency. The square wave duty factor, and
thus the filtered D-C VCO bias voltage, varies according to the selected VCO frequency.
Transfer functions of the various blocks are illustrated in Figure 4-2.
r 4
LOW
FREQ.
CRYSTAL
osc.
O0
fLF L
I
NfLF fHF-NfLF FREQUENCY
FREOUENCY MIXER 4 c-
,2
‘,N
L
b A + A
fHF
WAFER
SW ITCHES
696-6008 -00
March, 1971 0
Page 4-2
Kx 17m 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
I I
IO KHz 25 KHz
FREQUENCY
HIGH DC
t
W PHASE LOCK
8
(25KHz SO. WAVE)
5
LOW DC
9
I
fDESlRED FREQ. 696-6009-00
a
FIGURE 4-2 TYPICAL LOOP TRANSFER FUNCTIONS
The NAV SMO is a 200 channel frequency synthesizer covering the band from 92.8 125 -
102. 7625MHz in 5OKHz steps. The block diagram is the red shaded portion of Figure
5-48. The basic frequencies appearing in the NAV SMO are tabulated in Table 4-2 and
also appear on the block diagram.
The VCO converts a dc bias voltage to a VHF frequency. The,buffer amplifiers isolate
the VCO from reverse conducted electrical interference signals and provide .lOmw out-
put levels for mixer injection. The Implicit Divide by Two circuit halves the VCO
frequency. A mixer is used to heterodyne the halved VCO frequency and the High
Frequency Rekference Oscillator.. The Mixer Low Pass Filter passes the difference
frequency and filters any spurious mixer products. In the Squaring Amplifier the analog
difference frequency is amplified and clipped to provide a 4. 5V square wave. The
Programmable Divider generates one output pulse for every N input pulses. Selection
of the divide ratio, N, is determined by the wafer switch coding. The 400KHz Reference
Oscillator is divided by 16 in the Phase and Frequency Comparator block to obtain a
25KHz reference. This block also compares the Programmable’Counter output in fre-
quency and phase with the 25KHz reference frequency and generates an appropriate
feedback signal to slew the loop until This variable frequency is locked to the 25KHz
reference. The Voltage Translator shifts the level of the error voltage from the Phase
and Frequency Comparator. The VCO Low Pass Filter is used to recover the D-C
component of the phase ‘detected, variable duty cycle, 25KHz square wave and to provide
Fteady state and dynamic loop stabilization. The formula for the synthesized frequency
is: fL;CO =2 (53. 93125 - .025N) MHz where N may be any number from 102 to 30 1.
T!le CCMM SMO is a 360 channel, frequency synthesizer covering the band of frequencies
from 118.00 to 135.95MHz in 50KHz steps. The block diagram is the red shaded portion
of figure 5-49. The basic frequencies appearing in the COMM SMO are tabulated in
Table 4 -2 and also appear on the block diagram.
13asic theory of the NAV SMC (Section 4. 2. 1. 2) applies to the COMM SMO. In order to
obtain 360 channels and transmit-receive sidestep transitions, the COMM band is split
into two 9MEIz Bands (118.00 - 126. 95MHz and 127. 00 - 135. 95MHz). Requirements for
T/K switching are summarized in Table 4-l.
r NAV
l-
SMO HIGH BAND
C OMM
Selected Channel 108.00 - 117.95MHz 118.00 - 126.95 R MHz 127.00 - 135.95 RMkz
(50KHz steps) 127.00 - 135. 95 T 118.00 - 126.95 T
VCO Frequency 92.8 125 - 102.7625MHz 127.00 - 135. 95MHz 118.00 - 126. 95MHz
(5OKHz steps)
Approx. Receiver
tuning voltage. 2.95 - 7.20 Volts 2.95 - 7.80
The phase locked loop synthesizes 180 channels in each 9MHz band and is switched be-
tween high and low bands with the High Reference Oscillator crystals and the VCO band
switch. This system provides 360 channels with a 180 digit counter and fast T-R transi-
tions without requiring special coding of the Programmable Divider. Note that the
receiver uses a combination of high and low side injection and that the first I-F frequency
is restricted to 9. OMHz.
The Out of Lock Disable block turns off the receiver buffer and transmitter buffer when
the SMO is out of lock or is the receive condition. The VCO is disabled in the two
unused MHz positions of the frequency selector.
Elements Common to NAV and COMM SMOS. Due to the similarity in function, the
Mixer Low Pass Filter, Squaring Amplifier, Programmable Divider, Phase and
Frequency Comparator, Square Wave Voltage Translator, and VCO Low Pass Filter
circuitry is of common design in the NAV SMO and COMM SMO. The differences in
counter divide ratios are handled in the COMM and NAV wafer switching. The simi-
larity of design makes possible trouble shooting methods employing comparison
techniques. This is discussed in detail in Section V. In the following discussion, NAV
schematic reference numbers appear without brackets and COMM schematic reference
numbers appear with brackets.
BALANCED MIXER
The balanced mixer configuration was chosen to minimize spurious generation and to
provide isolation between the digital circuitry, the VCO, and the high reference os-
cillator. The balanced mixer consists of transformers, T206 (T304), T207 (T306),
diode quad CR207 (CR309) thru CR210 (CR3121 and capacitors C232 (C364) and C233
(C365). Bifilar wound helical transformers and low capacitance, low noise, hot carrier,
mixer diodes are used to maintain mixer balance.
Capacitors C239 (C375), C240 (C376) and inductor L204 (L305) comprise a basic pi-
section low pass filter, which is used to remove high frequency mixer products.
Horizontal : O.O5psec/DIV
Trace: C241
Vertical: 50mV /DIV
Selected Freq. : 112. 50MHz
SQUAR.ING AMPLIFIER
Transistors Q208 (Q3 12) and Q209 (Q3 13) are used in a complementary configuration to
provide wide band amplification and clipping. The output waveform is a 4 volt square
wave as indicated in Figure4 -5.
696-60 12-00
FIGURE 4-5 SQUARING AMPLIFIER
~OOKHZ REFERENCE
The low frequency reference oscillator and its waveform are illustrated in Figure 4-6.
Transistors Q210 (Q3 15) and Q211 (Q3 16) are connected as an astable multivibrator.
Crystal Y202 (Y303 KX 175: only) acts as a series resonant element controlling thk
oscillation of the multivibrator. The 400KHz low frequency reference signal is applied
to both the COMM and NAV phase and frequency discriminator circuits.
R2.5
a
47K
0211
696-6013-00
DIGITAL CIRCUITRY
A. LOGIC REVIEW
Two types of logic circuitry are used in the KX 170A, KX 175, these are, Resistor-
Transistor Logic (RTL) and Transistor-Transistor Logic (TTL). Typical gate
schematics are shown in Figure 4-7. Typical supply voltages are 3. 6 volts for
RTL and 5.0 volts for TTL. Basic gates and JK Flip Flop are defined symbolically
and functionally in Figure 4-8. In the KX 170A / KX 175 the Nand gates are TTL,
the Nor gates are RTL, and the J-K flip-flops are TTL.
TTL
vcc
NAND
GATE
ToUTpuT
L OUTPUT
NOR
GATE
a
FIGURE 4-7 TYPICAL GATE CIRCUITS
I. GATES
Inputs outputs
All high (1) Low (0)
Any low (0) High (1)
A. 5
B. NOR All low (0) High (1)
Any high (1) Low (0) 0
In a J -K flip-flop, output changes are initiated by the clock pulse according to the state
of the J-K inputs at the time of the clock pulse transition.
B. COUNTER REVIEW
The function of the counter is to provide one output pulse for every N input pulses.
This means F (out) = F(in)/N. In a programmable counter N may be selected from
any one of several choices. Programmable counters are divided into two’ classifi-
cations; reset counters and preset counters. The reset counter uses the principle
that when the counter reaches a selected load state it sets to a fixed reset state
and then recycles. The preset counter reaches a fixed load state, sets to a select-
ed preset state and recycles.
Counters are further specified on the basis of the count method employed. The
most common method used is to establish a decimal weighted code for each flip-
flop and to gate the respective outputs accordingly. Refer to Figure 4-9a.
Typical of this method would be a binary counter. The KX 170A/KX 175 incorpor-
ates a shift-counter. In this system, the information is shifted from left to right
through the register giving a cyclical code. A typical shift counter is shown in
Figure 4-9b.
P-- cp v-c -c -c -c
320 320 320 320
-K 0 -K 5 -K 5 -K (5 K
WEIGHTED
RESET STATE
CODE
0
I
I248
0
I
0
0
0
0
0
0
F WEIGHTED CODE
TO
I
A
0
I
0
0
0
C
0
0
D
0
0
2 0 I 0 0 2 0 I 0 0
3 1100 3 I 0 I 0
4 0 0 I 0 4 0 I 0 I
5 I 0 I 0 SELECTED 5 0 0 I 0
6 0 I I 0 PRESET 6 I 0 0 I
STATES
SELECTED 7 I I I 0 7 I I 0 0
LOAD 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 I I 0
STATES 9 I 0 0 I 9 I 0 I I
IO 0 I 0 I IO I I 0 I
II I I 0 I II I I I 0
I2 0 0 I I 12 0 I I I
I3 I 0 I I \ I3 0 0 I I
I4 0 I I I LOAD STATE 14 0 0 0 I
I5 I I I I
696-6016-00
a
FIGURE 4-9 RESET AND PRESET COUNTERS
C. PROGRAMMABLE DIVIDER
280 108 1 1 1 0 20 . 00 1 1 1 1 0
260 109 0 1 1 1 19 . 05 0 1 1 1 0
240 110 0 0 1 1 18 . 10 1 0 1 1: 1
220 111 0 0 0 1 17 . 15 0 0 1 1 1
200 112 0 0 0 0 16 .20 1 0 0 1 1
180 1-13 1 0 0 0 15 .25 0 0 0 1 1
160 114 0 1 0 0 14 .30 1 0. 0 0 1
140 115 1 0 1 0 13 .35 0 0 0 O , l
120 116 0 1 0 1 12 .40 1 0 0 0 0
100 117 0 0 1 0 11 .45 0 0 0 0 0
80 1 0 0 1 10 . 50 1 1 0 0 0
60 1 1 0 0 9 .55 0 1 0 0 0
40 0 1 1 0 8 . 60 1 1 1 0 0
20 1 0 1 1 7 .65 0 1 1 0 0
6 . 70 1 0 1 1 0
(Load State) 1 1 0 1 5 .75 0 0 1 1 0
4 .80 1 1 0 1 1
3 .85 0 1 0 1 1
2 . 90 1 1 1 0 1
1( Load. 95 0 1 1 0 1
State)
Selected Frequency Division (N) = Nl + N2 + 1
Page 4-14
’ /
March, 197 1
l
KX 17!!&!X 175
NAVJGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
Nl
-
MHz
PRESET -MO -M1 M3
- N2
-
KHz
PRESET
Koo KgK1K2 K3
280 118, 127 1 1 1 0 20 .oo 1 1 1 1 0
260 119, 128 0 1 1 1 19 .05 0 1 1 1 0
240 120, 129 0 0 1 1 18 . 10 1 0 1 1 1
220 121,130 0 0 0 1 17 .15 0 0 1 1 1
200 122,131 0 0 0 0 16 .20 1 0 0 1 1
180 123,132 1 0 0 0 15 .25 0 0 0 1 1
160 124,133 0 1 0 0 14 .30 1 0 0 0 1
140 125, 134 1 0 1 0 13 .35 0 0 0 0 1
120 126, 135 0 1 0 1 12 .40 1 0 0 0 0
100 0 0 1 0 11 .45 0 0 0 0 0
80 0 0 1 10 .50 1 1 0 0 0
60 1 0 0 9 .55 0 1 0 0 0
40 1 1 0 8 .60 1 1 1 0 0
20 0 1 1 7 65 0 1 1 0 0
(Load State) 1 0 1 6 :70 1 0 1 1 0
5 .75 0 0 1 1 0
4 80 1 1 0 1 1
3 :85 0 1 0 1 1
2 .90 1 1 1 0 1
l(Load. 95 0 1 1 0 1
State)
Selected Frequency Division (N) = Nl + N2 + 1
Figures 5-50 and 5-51 show the integrated circuits in the relationship that they appear
on the NAV SMO and COMM SMO printed circuit boards. The Counter Timing Diagram
appears in Figure 5-32. Figure 4-13 presents the digital circuitry symbolically. The
black line portion is the programmable divider. J-K flip-flop 1 1201 (1301) performs the
divide by 2 function. During normal operation, the J-K inputs, Pins 3, 5, and 15 are
high and Pin 4, the I? input, is low. Reference to the truth table of Figure 4-8, reveals
that in this mode of operation, the J-K flip-flop toggles on every positive transition of the
clock pulse. Each time the Ql output (Pin 6) goes positive, the clock pulse line of the
9300 1206 (1306) is clocked.
Flip-flop 2 presets flip-flop 1 when the counter reaches the load state. During normal
operation the J2 inputs, Pin 13 and 14 are high, the K2 input, Pin 12, is high, and
flip-flop 2 remains with Q2 high, regardless of the K99 input to pin 11. When the load
state is reached, pin 6 of the 9004 1204 (1304) goes negative. If the preset input, pin
11 is high, the preset clock-pulse will drive Q2 low. If the preset input, pin 11, has
been low the next pulse would leave Q’2 high. If pin 10 (Q2) remains high then the K input
to flip-flop 1 remains high and flip-flop 1 continues to act as a toggle flip-flop. However,
if pin 10 goes low, flip-flop 1 automatically shifts a high state to the Ql output at pin 6.
The divide by 2 function and the preset waveform are illustrated in Figure 5-32.
The 9300 is a synchronous, 4 flip-flop shift register. Serial entry is available through
the J-l? inputs during positive clock transitions. Parallel entry is through PO, Pl, P2,
and P3 inputs when simultaneously: the Parallel Enable (PE) port is low and the clock
pulse (Cp) makes a positive transition. Outputs QO, Ql, Q2, Q3, a3 and an asynchro-
nous master reset (MR) are externally available. The 9300 internal logic is shown in
Figure 4-10.
CP
Q'O QI Q2 Q3
696-6017-00
Two input nand Gate D 1203 (1303) and the KHz 9300 1206 (1306) are connected to provide
a 10 state shift counter. The 9004, Section B of 1204 (13041, is used to monitor Gl
of flip-flop 1 and QO, Ql and Q3 of the KHz 9300. When the 4 inputs are high, the out-
put goes low. The next clock pulse toggles flip-flop 1 causing the output of the 4 input
nand gate to go high providing the clock pulse to the MHz 9300 1202 (1302) . The 9004
provides 1 output pulse for every 20 input pulses to flip-flop 1. See Figure 5-32.
The J and l!? gates on the MHz 9300 are wired to provide a 15 state counter. Section
A of the 9004, 1204 (1304), monitors the inverted clock pulse and QO, Ql, and Q3 of
the-MHz 9300. The counter load state occurs when all of these inputs are high. In
the load state the 9004 output goes to a low voltage, providing a parallel enable to
the 9020 and the 9300’s. The next clock pulse transition strobes in the preset in-
formation.
Note that the 9300 has a persistent all one state. This means that if for any reason
Qo> &I> Q2, and Q3 all have ones, the 9300 will continue to shift ones to the input.
This undesirable mode of operation could cause the + 10 or G-15 counters to latch in
the all ones state. If this situation occurs in either 9300, the associated 9004 gate
output pulses with every clock pulse to quickly toggle to the load state. When the
load state is reached, the preset information is strobed into the 9300’s and flip-flop
1, correcting the persistent all one state in the 9300. Normal operation ensues.
Schematics 5-50 and 5-51 show the integrated circuits in the relationship that they
appear on the NAV SMO and COMM SMO printed circuit boards. ‘fhe Phase and
Frequency Comparator Timing Diagram appears in Figure 5-33. The red line
portion of Figure 4 -13 presents the Phase and Frequency Comparator symbolically.
The 400KHz low reference oscillator square wave is divided by the 9989 1205 (1305)
to provide a 25KHz reference. Two input nor gates B and C in MC817P #2 1208(1308)
are interconnected as a set-reset flip-flop. This flip-flop is used to provide phase
comparison of the programmable counter output pulse and the 25KHz reference pulse.
When the loop is properly phase locked, there is a one for one pulse relationship
between the 25KHz reference and the programmable divider 25KHz output, and their
relative phase is constant. A positive going pulse at Pin 6 of 1208 (1308) causes
Pin 5 to go negative and resets the flip-flop. A positive going pulse from the counter
to Pin 9 causes Pin 5 to go positive and sets the flip-flop. The output of the flip-
flop during phase lock conditions is a square wave with a duty cycle proportional to
the relative phase of the two pulse trains.
When the system is out of lock, the programmable counter output frequency need
not equal 25KHz. More pulses are received at one port of the set-reset flip-flop
than the other. If a pulse is received at one set-reset port, and the associated
frequency divider counts to a load state again before a pulse appears at the other
set-reset port, the divider latches and waits for the desired pulse on the second
port. When a pulse is finally received at the second port, the counterunlatches
from its load state and immediately pulses the first port. This type of operation
results in a set-reset flip-flop output that is nearly all high or all low depending on
whether the counter is below or above the desired frequency. See Figures 4-11
and 5-33.
+I
LATCH I
I
PROGRAMMABLE LOAD LOAD STATE
f X
DIVIDER 7 m STATE w SET
SENSE COMPARATOR
b
-OUTPUT
r
1
400 KHz LOAD LOAD STATE
400KHz - A
w ) STATE b RESET
DIVIDER SENSE COMPARATOR
b
LATCH
,
The programmable counter latches when pin 14 of 1201 (I-301) goes negative. Gates B
and C in 1203 (1303) and B in 1207 (1307) are used to sense coincidence of the counter
load state and the flip-flop set state.
The divide by 16 1205 (1305) latches when pin 1 of gate A in 1207 (1307) goes positive.
Gates C and D of 1207 (1307) and A of 1208 (1308) are used to sense the divide by 16
load state and the flip-flop reset state coincidence.
The basic transfer function of the Phase and Frequency Comparator is illustrated in
Figure 4-2C and 5-33. If power is turned on or channels are changed the appropriate
high or low voltage is generated to sweep the VCO toward the selected channel frequency,
whereupon the VCO is captured by the reference frequency with phase sensitive detector
action.
When Q307 is biased off, the Transmit Buffer, Q306, and Receiver Buffer, Q303,
are disabled. During proper phase lock operation, the base of Q307 is high,
saturating the transistor and enabling the Transmit and Receive Buffers.
If the loop fails to lock, the frequency discriminator supplies a latch signal to either
the Programmable Frequency Divider or the 400KHz divide by 16. The latch signal
causes either pin 12 or 13 of 1308 to go positive, causing the gate output, pin 14, to
go to ground. Failure modes occur that could cause pulsations to occur on the gate
output at pin 14. Capacitor C 564 holds the low voltage peaks at pin 14, turning Q307
off and disabling the Transmit and Receive Buffers.
Transistors Q204 (Q308) and Q205 (Q309) are used to amplify the set-reset flip-flop
output and to provide voltage translation to obtain the proper voltage for the VCO
bias.
I- l/4 9002
.,pc r-
69 I4 Is Is I7
* J PE ‘0 ‘I ‘2 ‘3 - -.--
CLOCK
PULSE Jc CP MHZ
INPUT 9300 3
at
+5 VDC t IO (IOOKHz)
P
3
I
I +s,vlx
400 KHz -
REF
eapt
t-
108. OOMHz
118. OOMHz
Low Pass Filter Input (Square wave) and Filtered Output (D-C)
Base Line 0 Volts
Vertical 2 Volts/DIV
Horizontal 1Opsec /DIV
696-6021-00
FIGURE 4 - 14 TYPICAL WAVEFORMS
a
VCO LOW PASS FILTER
March, 197 1 Page 4-21
KI G
KX 170A 7 KX 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
The filter includes an elliptic low pass section to recover D-C voltage from the 25KHz
square wave and a lead-lag section to provide loop stability. See Figure 4-14 and 4-15.
vco
LOW PASS FILTER
Rf, Rf C
(b) (C)
FIGURE 4-16 BASIC VCO PRINCIPLES
(Dwg. No. 696 -6023 -00)
Page 4-22 Rev. 2, December, 1972
KX 170A/KX
ZiK
175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
A parallel tuned circuit is formed in (a) by Lbc and the series combination of Cbe and
c . Regeneration is provided by positive feedback from the emitter to base. Tuning
ise&complished by varying the inductance of Lbc. Since w Lbc = wL1 - -1, in (b),
tuning may be done .by varying the bias on C,. R1 in (c) is used as an oscillator pickoff
point. Refer to Figures 4- 17 and 4- 18 for circuitry.
+8.5VDC
w
1. C268 1. C267
c201
T =
470
Tz
0. IJJf
fitif
dt-
-=:
7%’ R203
10% 470
R204 ,-C206
VHF OUT
RCVR
TUNING
VOLTAGE
TUNING
VO LTAGE
1
C320
>
“;o”,” 470
?g ;-;I;
. 7
w -
41 /I ”
c315 CM7
,030l
T 2-27 x .X3
HI-LO 1
vco VHF
_Lc3,0 svco”
s 4’o -OUT
I
7‘ c307
1500 C304
470
'T
I *
c302 ---IL304
,500 FSE
T’
696-6025-00
The COMM VCO is switched from the high band (127. 00 - 135. 95MHz) to the low band
(118. 00 - 126. 95MHz) by switching in trimmer capacitor C314. The bias ground returns
(cathodes of CR301 and CR3021 are opened to disable the COMM VCO in the two unused
MHz positions. L201, (C314) and (C315) provide an alignment adjustment for the NAV
and COMM VCO’s.
BUFFER AMPLIFIERS
The buffers are class A, broadband amplifier stages. NAV buffer stages include Q202
and Q203. COMM buffer stages include Q303, Q304 and Q306. The COMM transmitter
buffer stage Q306 is disabled during receive by Q305 and during SMO failure by Q307.
n-303
so IPf
C32B i
I
RECEIVER BUFFER
-l
IMPLICIT DIVIDE BY 2
This circuit includes a mixer and an amplifier connected as shown. Regeneration occurs
if the gain of the amplifier is greater than the insertion loss of the mixer. The only
stable condition occurs when fout = 1/2in. A balanced mixer configuration is used to
provide isolation. The amplifier is a low Q tuned amplifier. The implicit divide by two
block diagram is shown in Figure 4-20.
Fm= 2 f&t
(YEL)
_p*
TP203I
-- c355 -
I I500
lo56
9% TOW
IO% = e-2 AMPL.
A Colpitts oscillator configuration is used. The crystal forms a parallel tuned circuit
with the series combination of Cbe and C,,. Cbe provides regenerative feedback to the
base.
-= I L-wL,
WCec WC1
In the COMM High Reference Oscillator the 71.025MHz crystal is selected for high SMO
band (127. 00 - 135.95MHz) and 66. 525MHz is selected for low SMO band, (118. 00-126.95-
MHz) operation. See Table 4-2 for corresponding receive and transmit frequencies.
.-.. R3.6
696-6031-00
FIGURE 4-24 HIGH REFERENCE OSCILLATCHS
The received antenna signal is coupled to the preselector through a diode T/R switch.
A 2-pole, varactor tuned, R-F filter couples the antenna to the R-F stage. A second
varactor tuned filter couples the amplified R-F signal to the 1st mixer and supplies
additional image and l/2 I-F spurious rejection. The amplified R-F signal is mixed
with the synthesized injection frequency in a balanced mixer. A two,pole crystal filter
couples the difference frequency to the second mixer and provides image and l/2 I-F
selectivity. The 8. 13875 MHz crystal controlled 2nd local oscillator develops injection
for the 2nd mixer. The 2nd I-F contains two integrated circuit (I-C) amplifiers with
three double-tuned interstage networks for additional receiver selectivity. An active
detector/noise limiter provides audio gain, rate noise limiting, and 90% AM clipping of
noise spikes. A two stage AGC amplifier is used to AGC the R-F stage, and the 1st
I-C amplifier in the 2nd I-F strip.
The receiver is approximately 6db into AGC with no input signal. This eliminates con-
ventional gain threshold effects and establishes a constant “Signal plus noise ” at the
detector output. The detector noise bandwidth is approximately 15KHz. A noise filter
passes white noise containing frequency components above 7KHz. The filtered noise
is amplified and used to operate a squelch gate. When detected white noise drops below
a preset threshold, the squelch gate opens. If a detected audio tone falls within the
filter passband, it is treated as noise and blocks the squelch. A carrier squelch over-
comes this problem by opening the squelch gate when the AGC exceeds a predetermined
voltage. Receiver Audio passes through the volume control, an audio amplifier and is
coupled to the audio summing junction.
The summing junction accepts four auxilary audio inputs including NAV. A diode switch
mutes the summing junction and connects the mike element to the audio power amplifier
during transmit. Headphone/sidetone is capacitively coupled from the audio drive amp-
lifier to the phone jack and is still operable with a blown fuse and shorted audio output
or R-F power transistors. The push-pull audio amplifier supplied 6 watts to the
balanced primary of the output transistor. The secondary includes separate speaker
and modulation windings.
The transmitter is a solid state, 4 stage, broadband, 30db gain, R-F power amplifier.
Collector modulation is applied to the driver and final stages. The low pass filter
The R-F input signal is coupled to Q411 through the top coupled, two pole filter.
Varactor diodes CR416 and CR417 tune the filter in 2MHz steps according to the bias
voltage received from the MHz tuning wafer. Variable inductors L407 and L409
provide filter alignment. Inductive coupling (L408) is used to maintain a fairly con-
stant coefficient of coupling over the band. Fixed capacitance is designed into the tanks
to absorb transistor capacitance. The filtered R-F signal is amplified by R-F Amplifier,
Q411. Forward AGC voltage is applied to the base. The amplified R-F signal is further
filtered by CR418, CR419, L411 and LA13 and coupled to balanced mixer transformer,
T412. The COMM frequency synthesizer develops 1Omw of Local Oscillator power
across the primary of T413. Capacitor C482 matches the characteristic impedance of
the crystal filter.
The difference frequency (9MHz) is coupled through the two pole crystal filter (FL403)
and applied to the base of the 2nd mixer, Q413. Tuned circuits, T414 and T415 provide
reactive tuning of the crystal filter.
The second Local Oscillator (Q409) is a Pierce oscillator. Crystal Y402 forms a
parallel resonant circuit with the series combination of C463 ‘and C460. The tap be-
tween C463 and C460 provides 180” phase. inversion of the collector feedback signal to
provide regeneration.
Rfc
C463
C460
c
696-6033-00
FIGURE 4 -25 SIMPLIFIED PIERCE OSCILLATOR
The 1st I-F and the 2nd Local Oscillator signals are injected on the base of the second
mixer, Q4 13. The difference frequency appears at the collector.
The three top coupled, double tuned filters, consisting of T416-421 and C484, C487 and
C49 1 provide receiver selectivity. Load resistors across T416-42 1 swamp variations
in active device impedances to provide uniform band pass characteristics. Integrated
circuits 1404 and 1405 are differential amplifiers with constant current sources, internal
biasing and decoupling resistors. See Figure 4-26. A positive voltage applied to R474
causes a differential unbalance and AGC action in 1404. In addition diode CR425 is
providing a variable resistance, shunt path to ground through C490. Resistor R473 is
used to minimize “deQing” of T417 with AGC action.
RI
5on
+E T 01
R2 v”+
2.5Kn OUTPUT
3 DECCNJPLINI; GJTPUT
0
INPUT
(TOP VIEW1
GND
0 696 -6034-00
FIGURE 4-26 SECOND I-F INTEGRATED CIRCUIT SCHEMA’I’IC
CR426 and R481 develop a trickle bias for collector detection transistor, Q414. Emit-
ter feedback resistor, R482, provides a high base impedance to minimize the loading
of T421. Detected audio voltage gain is determined by the ratio of the effective collector
resistance and R482. C496 establishes the collector time constant in conjunction with
the parallel collector resistance.
Noise limiter action occurs when CR427 is back biased. Detected audio is attenuated
by R489 and R490. Resistors R488 and R492 establish a forward bias current through
CR427. The charge storage of C498 establishes a D-C reference. Positive noise peaks
back bias CR427 when the cathode rises to within0. 6 volts of the D-C reference.
R492 and C499 establish a time constant that restricts the rate of change of voltage at
the anode of CR427. The rate limiting effect rounds off the leading edges of fast rise
time noise spikes. C499 couples the audio signal to the squelch gate.
RF AMPL.
AGC AGC
+a 5vDc 696-6035-00
During radio turn on, the voltage at TP411 is approximately 1 volt and is established by
the R-F, and I-F bias currents flowing through R493 to ground. R487 and C495 filter
the detector output and apply the resultant D-C to the base of Q415. Q415 compares the
AGC threshold reference voltage generated by R484, CR432, R485, and R486 with the
filtered detector signal. Q415 and Q416 jointly provide AGC amplification; C497 provides
additional AGC filtering. Zener diode, CR424, provides R-F AGC delay to assure
proper receiver quieting.
C501, C502, C503, R500, L414 and the input impedance of Q419 form an elliptic high
pass filter that rejects frequencies below 7KHz. Q419 amplifies the noise. R504 and
RT501 provide temperature compensation. R483, the Carrier/Noise Squelch Adjust,
controls the amount of filtered noise at the tie point of R504 and RT501.
Q420 and CR429 develop 7. 5VDC across C508 when the peak to peak voltage of the white
noise,exceeds the sum of the forward voltages of the junctions of Q420 and CR429
(approximately 1.3V p-p). On positive voltage swings, Q420, charges C 508. On nega-
tive swings, CR429 clamps C507 against the new voltage on C508. Each positive noise
peak is integrated, increasing the D-C voltage across C508 untilQ420 saturates at an
emitter voltage of approximately 7. 5 volts. When the noise falls below the squelch .
threshold, R506 discharges C508 causing squelch gate diode CR431 to pass audio signals.
Q417 and Q418 form a differential amplifier for comparison of the AGC voltage with the
carrier squelch adjustment. When the AGC voltage exceeds the reference voltage, the
collector of Q4 18 goes negative, forward biasing squelch diode CR431.
The test switch grounds the cathode of CR430 causing the squelch gate diode, CR431, to
pass received signals.
Audio passes from the squelch gate to the volume control located on the front panel,
and back to class A audio amplifier, Q410. The amplifier audio is connected to summing
junction resistor R703.
Resistor R703-7C7 and I2722 provide a summing junction. In the receive condition,
CR701 is reverse biased and CR702 is forward biased, passing audio to the audio pre-
driver stage, Q701. When the mike is keyed, the T / R relay grounds H721, which
mutes CR702 audio and forward biases CR701 applying mike audio to Q70l.
The inputs to the VHF power amplifier are, the R-F output from the buffer amplifier in
the COMM/SMO and audio from the audio modulator. When the microphone switch is
depressed, a CW signal is coupled through C602 to the base of &SOL QSOl output from
transformer T601 is’ coupled through C605’to the base of Q602, the pre-driver amp-
lifier. The output of &SO2 consists of the tuned circuit of T602, C609, and C610 and
couples to the base of the driver amplifier Q603,
The driver amplifier Q603, has dual emitters which are R-F by-passed by C611 and
C612. The output tuned circuit T603, C618 and C619 drives the final amplifier. R6 13 is
used to de-Q transformer T603. Transformer T604 and capacitor C622 match the
transmitter to the low pass filter through capacitor, C623.
RF Amplifiers Q601 and Q602 are supplied a filtered voltage from the radio D-C power
source.
The resistor and diode combination of R608, R615, CR601 and CR602 provides full
‘modulation to Q604 and upward modulation only to Q603. c
The low pass filter is a 3 section elliptical filter made up of sections FL601, FL602,
and FL603. Its purpose is to greatly reduce the harmonic output signals from the power
amplifier. The filter output couples directly to the antenna jack 5172.
The resistor and diode combination used in the first two sections provide T-R switching.
In the receive condition the relay K701 supplies a positive D-C voltage to diodes CR603
and CR604 through resistors R6 16 and R617. The capacitors C625 and C626 are VHF
bypasses, and choke L604 provides a D-C voltage return. Received signals pass through
the 3rd filter section FL603, diode CR604, and then to the receiver. Diode CR603 acts
to minimize the insertion loss of the T/R switch. In the transmit condition, the D-C
voltage is removed from the resistor, diode combination by relay K701 and the R-F
power from the transmitter reverse biases diodes CR603 and CR604 due to self-
rectification.
The 13. 75V input power line is filtered by an L section low pass filter network, using a
series inductor L701 with shunt capacitors C711 and C712 (See Figure 4-28).. The R-F
Transmitter, Audio Driver and Audio Output derive power from the filtered 13. 75VDC
buss. The COMM voltage regulator input is also obtained from this filtered supply.
L701
P/O PI71
Imh
m (ORN/WHT) ti3.75vOc IN ,8
lGND 21
=
696-6036-00
Transistors Q102 and Q105 form a series regulator element. Transistor Q104 compares
the attenuated output voltage at the wiper of pot R132 with the reference voltage at the
cathode of zener diode C’R103. Additionally Q104 amplifies the err-or signal and provides
negative feedback to the base of Q105. .-
Transistors QlOl and Q103 are connected to form a series pass element. Zener diode
CR102, provides reference voltage to the series pass element.
RI27
75
5% _ NW +13.75VDC YELIWHT
FROM NAV FILTER
t 13.75vDC
FROM C@,jM.
+ I3.75Vw.z
FILTER
l
TO COMM. REC., COMM. SMO,
REG. OUTPUT SlO2 TUNING VOLT.
Rl3;
A 2 pole, varactor tuned, R-F filter couples the antenna to the R-F stage . A single
pole, varnctor tuned filter, couples the amplified R-F signal to the 1st mixer and
supplies additional image and l/2 I-F spurious rejection. The amplified R-I;’ signal is
mixed with the synthesized injection frequency in a balanced mixer.
-4 crystal i‘ilter couples the difference frequency to the second mixer and provides
i!-na!,re :Ind l/2 1-F selectivity. The 14. 0018MHz, crystal controlled, 2nd Ldcal Oscil-
lator develop::- in,lection for the 2nd mixer. , The 2nd I-F contains two I-C amplifiers
l:iriti-1 ttlr,c:e double tuned interstage networks for receiver selectivity. An active detector
pr:)i,~iiies audio gain. An emitter follower couples the detector signal to the noise limit-
er and the ,4GC amplifier. The noise limiter clips noise peaks corresponding to greater
than 90% AM modulation and provides rate limiting. A two stage, AGC amplifier is used
to AGC the R-F stage, and the 2nd I-F strip.
The receiver is approximately 6db into AGC with no input signal. This eliminates con.-
ventional receiver gain threshold effects. The audio signal from the rate noise limiter
prisses through a panel switch controlled 1020Hz ident filter, the volume control and
til,Jn to an I-C audio amplifier providing a 50mw 600 ohm output.
The 1’:- f? input signal is coupled to the R-E’ amplifier Q401, through a capacitor coupled
l;vo pole filter. Variable inductors, L40 1 and L403 provide filter alignment. Varactor
diodes Cl%401 and CR402 tune the filter continuously according to the b,ias voltage
receiyvred from the NAV VCO. The filtered Ii- II‘ signal is amplified by f<- I;‘ amplifier,
Q401, and gain is controlled by applying forward ACIC voltage to the base. i.-he amp-
lified Z-I;‘ signal is filtered by I.,405 and Ctt403, tuned by the bias voltage from the
N:\\,’ ,SWtO, <and coupled to the balanced mixer transformer, ‘1‘401. The NAL’ frequency
synthesizer develops 10mw of Local Oscillator power across the primary of mixer
transformer l-402.
The difference frequency 15. 1875MHz generated by the balanced mixer, CR404-407,.
T401, and T402 is matched to the crystal filter through C415. The crystal filter output
is capacitively coupled (C417) to the base of the second mixer Q403.
Crystal Y401 forms a parallel resonant circuit with the series combination of C448 and
C447. The tap be$ween C448 and C447 provides 180” phase inversion of the collector
feedback signal to provide regeneration. (See Figure 4-27)
The 1st I. F. and the 2nd Local Oscillator signals are injected on the base of the second
mixer, Q403. The difference frequency appears at the collector.
The three capacitor coupled, double tuned filters consisting of T405 - 410 and C419,
C424 and C428 provide receiver selectivity. Load resistors across T405- 4 19
swamp variations in active device impedances to provide uniform band pass character-
istic s. Integrated circuits 1401 and 1402 are differential amplifiers with a constant
current source, internal biasing and a decoupling resistor. See Figure 4-28. A
positive voltage applied to R4 14 causes a differential unbalance and AGC action in 140 1.
In addition diode CR409 is forward biased, providing an AGC’d shunt path to ground
tllrough C422. Resistor R413 is used to minimize “de Q ing” of T406 with AGC action.
CR4lOand It421 developa trickle bias for collector detection transistor, Q404. Emitter
feedback resistor, R424, provides a high base impedance to minimize loading of T410.
Voltage gain of the detected audio is determined by the ratio of the effective collector
resistance and R424. C437 establishes the collector time constant in conjunction with
the parallel collector resistance. Emitter follower, Q405, serves to minimize the
loadhg effect of the noise limiter on the detector (Q404) output.
Noise Limiter action occurs when CR411 is reverse biased. Detected audio is attenuated
by R428 and R427. Resistors R429 and R430, and diode CR412, establish a bias current
through CR41 1. The charge storage of C440 establishes a DC reference. Positive noise
peaks back bias CR411 when the cathode rises to within 0. 6 volts of the DC reference.
12429, <:439 and C438 establish a time constant that restricts the rate of change of volt-
age at the anode of CR4 11. The rate limiting effect rounds off the, corners of fast rise
time noise spikes. C439 couples the audio signal to the ident filter.
The VOR/LOC signal is available at the collector of detection transistor Q404. R425
is provided to set the VOR/LOC output level that is coupled through C443 to the rear
connector of the KX 170A/KX 175.
During radio turn on, the voltage at TP406 is approximately 1 volt and is established
by the R-F, and I-F bias currents flowing through R437 to ground. R431 and R432 with
C444 and C441 filters the detector output and applies the resultant D-C to the base of
Q406. Q406 compares the AGC threshold reference voltage at the junction of RT502
and R434 with the filtered detector signal.
Q406 and Q407 jointly provide AGC amplification. C442 provides additional filtering,
A trade off is made between AGC response time and AGC line filtering of the 30Hz
component of the detector signal. The AGC amplifier/filter network shifts the 30Hz
residue 180” from the detected 30Hz, which minimizes phase distortion of the 30Hz AM
component of the VOR signal.
Zener diode CR408 initially conducts in the forward direction applying full AGC to the
I-F. As signal level increases, CR408 is biased off applying full AGC to the RF stage.
A further increase of the RF signal causes the diode to conduct in the reverse direction
applying AGC to both the R-F and I-F stages.
+B SVDC
T T
RF AMPL.
AGC
TP40f
9
AGC I 7 I A6c I
t6.5VDC
C439 cou$es the audio signal to the Ident Filter. The 1020 Hz tone filter L703 and C716
are switched in or out by the front panel Ident Switch. The audio signal passes from the
Ident Filter to the volume control on the front panel and back to the I-C audio amplifier
1403. Components R448, R449, L406 and C454-C457, form an elliptic low pass filter
providing a sharp frequency rolloff above 3KHz. R450 and C458 develop negative feed-
back to stabilize gain and minimize broadband output noise. Transformer T411 trans-
forms the output impedance of audio amplifier 1403 to 500 ohms and this audio output is
provided at the rear connector of the KX 170A/ KX 175. The voltage supply for 1403 is
stabilized by zener diode CR414 and filtered by C452.
The KA 39 consists of dual series regulators, converting 27. 5VDC to 13. 75VDC. The
“A” regulator provides COMM excitation, while the “B” regulator provides NAV
excitation. Zener diodes CR101 and CR104 provide reference voltages to the darlington
series pass elements QlO2 - QlOl and Q104 - Q103 respectively. Diodes CR102 and
CR103 offer transient and reverse power application protection.
-- --
RI04
1’ 0
6n
I
I
INPUT hO,,PUT
I
I- mm-
& KA-39 CONVERTER
-- -I
002-Ol62-OO(R-2)
SECTION
V
MAINTENANCE
5.1 TESTEQUIPMENT i i
The following test equipment, or equivalent, is required to properly align and test the
KX 170A/KX 175 system. All test equipment must be properly calibrated before align-
ment and tests are started.
5.2 ALIGNMENT
ANDTESTPROCEDURE
5.2. 1 NAV SMO ALIGNMENT AND TEST (Figures 5-1, 5-3)
b. Remove three screws on each side of the COMM SMO tray and one screw
at the front. Pivot the COMM SMO up and over the front of the radio.
C. Remove two screws in center area of NAV SMO cover and remove cover.
e. Apply 13. 75 volts to NAV Receiver (switch power on NAV only) and observe
voltage at C R2 14, if greater than 5. 75 volts, switch power off to avoid I. C.
damage. If OK proceed to next step.
f. Connect a digital voltmeter to the anode lead of, CR101 at NAV Voltage
Regulator and observe an 8. 5 f. 5 volts indication on voltmeter.
g* NAV Receiver power requirements are 13. 75 volts input at .45 amp with no
modulated RF signal present.
1. Connect a digital voltmeter to TP 20 1 and adjust L201 for 7. 200 -VDC tuning
(VCO) voltage.
k. (Optional) NAV SMO frequency stability and tuning (VCO) voltage may be
observed simultaneously by connecting a frequency counter to the coax
side of C231 10 pf disc capacitor) and connecting a digital voltmeter to
the tuning voltage line (red wire at C2 58 feed thru capacitor).
Channel the NAV frequency selector through the followmg frequencies, com-
paring the frequency and tuning (VCO) voltage with Table 5-l.
1. Replace NAV SMO cover and install the two screws previously removed.
a. Remove the two screws and top cover from the COMM SMO.
d. Apply 13. 75 volts to COMM Receiver (switch power on COMM only) and
observe voltage at CR319, if greater than 5. 75 volts, switch power off to
avoid I. C. damage. If OK proceed to next step.
TP304 j. Set the COMM frequency selector to 135. 95MHz and adjust C3 14 for 7.00
VDC VCO tuning voltage at TP30 1.
m. (Optional) COMM SMO frequency stability and VCO voltage may be observ-
ed simultaneously by connecting a frequency counter to TP303 and connect-
ing a digital voltmeter to TP301.
696-6041-00
n. Remove the temporary mounting screws and position COMM SMO cover in
place with the two screws previously removed.
0. Mount the COMM SMO tray with three screws on each side and one screw
at the front.
696-6042-00
a. Remove the receiver board retaining screws (5 places) noting the positiolt
of the ground lug. Loosen the two hinge pivot screws, pivot the board 90
and retighten the hinge pivot screws.
b. Set channel selector to 117. 95 MHz and connect a digital voltmeter to the
NAV receiver tuning voltage test point (TP40 1 of Figure 5-6B) and ohs:. rve
7.20 VDC. If correct verify the tuning voltage versus channel frequency
of Table 523. If not 7.20 VDC. L201 may be adjusted through access
hole in bottom of NAV SMO tray’ (Figure 5-4). Refer to 5. 2. 1 for adjust-
ment procedure.
NAV VCO C. Connect a frequency counter to point “X” of Figure 5-6A and verify the
SMO frequency versus channel frequency of Table 5-3. ’
, TUNING
ADJUSTMENT
Channel SMO Frequency Receiver Tuning
Voltage Typical
108.00 92.8 125 MHz 2.84 VDC
109.00 93.8 125 MHz 3. 15 VDC
110.00 94.8 125 MHz 3.‘49 VDC
111.00 95.8 125 MHz 3.85 VDC
112.00 96.8 125 MHz 4. 24 VDC
113.00 97.8 125 MHz 4. 66 VDC
114.00 98.8 125 MHz 5. 11 VDC
115.00 99.8125 MHz 5. 59 VDC
116.00 100.8 125 MHz 6. 10 VDC
117.00 10 1.8 125 MHz 6. 66 VDC
117.95 102.7625 MHz 7. 20 VDC
d. Connect a digital voltmeter to the COMM receiver tuning voltage test point
(TP408 of Figure 5-6B) and verify the tuning voltage versus channel fre-
quency of Table 5-4.
e. Connect a frequency counter to point “Y” of Figure 5-6A and verify the
SMO frequency versus channel frequency of Table 5-4.
-NOTE-
a. Test points and alignment references may be located on Figures 5-5, 5-6A
and 5-6B.
b. Apply 13. 75 VDC to unit and place the NAV “OFF-VOICE-IDENT” switch
in the “IDENT” position.
e. Set the RF signal generator output for 10~~ hard at a frequency of 108. 00
MHz (use frequency counter) and connect to NAV antenna input connector.
- L703 a. Preliminary - If receiver is badly out of alignment, peak all tuning adjust-
ments (2nd IF, 1st IF and RF).
6044 --00 d. Load point 0 (T408) with 3. 3Kn and peak (T407)
a. Load point W (L40 1) to ground with 220R and repetitively peak (L403)
and (L405) until no further improvement.
b. Load point V (L403) to ground with 2200 and peak (L40 1).
d. Adjust R425 for 0. 35 volt RMS LOC output at TP407 (VOR/LGC output).
-NOTE-
b. Apply 13. 75 VDC to unit and place the “OFF-ON-TEST” switch in the
“TEST” position (squelch open). .
5. 2. 5. 2 ALIGNMENT PROCEDUKE ’
5. 2. 5. 3 2nd I. F. ALIGNMENT
d. Load point C (T4 19) with 3. 3K0 and peak (T4 18).
----vm
BNC 4.7K
INPUT
MINIMUM. STRAY
CAPACITANCE 1
I
ATTENUATED
RF OUTPUT
696-6050-00
--
r
42PIN AMPHENOL
1 5171
1 NAV. +13.75VDC
I
20 POWER INPUT 1
+ +13,75VDC
LAMP DIM'R.
33
POWER GND.
21 c GROUND
1
LAMP DIM'R. GND. z
38 r----i
17 COMM. SWITCHED BUSS
18 COMM. +13.75VDC
VORiLOC OUTPUT
3
AUX. AUDIO #l IN --I
36
NAV. SOOAOUT
35
SPKR. hAOUT =
41
SPKR.
SPKR. GND.
COMM. 500 OUT T COPPI. PHONE
34
MIKE KEY x-
LtO
MIKE AUDIO MIKE
39 xl
”
TRANSMITTER
(NAV)
696-6051-00
L -I
FIGURE 5-11 KX 170-A/KX 175 BENCH TEST SETUP
Serial No.
Date
1. Receiver Sensitivity:
3. Selectivity:
5. Headphone Audio : mw
Transmitter:
1. Power Out:
Low Voltage :
2. Modulation: Capabilities
Hardware ok
Paperwork ok
Glyptol ok
Test Stamp ok
NAVIGATION RECEIVER
OMNI
3. AGC Characteristic : w.
4. Course Accuracy: A 0, B 0.
LOCALIZER
AUDIO
1. Sensitivity :
2. Quieting :
3. AGC Characteristic :
4. Audio Output:
watts min. undistorted mw max. fully CCW
6. Selectivity :
MECHANICAL :
Hardware (ok)
Paperwork (ok)
Glyptol (ok)
Test Stamp (ok)
5.3 GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance information contained in this section includes inspection procedures, clean-
ing, semiconductor replacement, and troubleshooting procedures.
The following visual inspection procedures should be performed during the course of
maintenance operations.
a. Inspect all wiring and coax cables for damaged insulation and proper termination
(broken strands and solder joint).
b. Check connectors cable connections, making sure they are free from corrosion
and are properly secured.
d. Check all components for evidence of vibration, lead breakage and broken or m-
secure mounting.
5. 3. 2 CLEANING
a. Using a clean lint-free cloth lightly moistened with an approved cleaning solvent
remove the foreign matter from the equipment case and unit front panels. Wipe
dry using a clean, dry, lint-free cloth.
b. Using a hand controlled dry air jet (not more than 15 psi), blow the dust from
inaccessible areas. Care should be taken to prevent damage by the air blast.
C. Clean electrical contacts with a burnishing tool or cloth lightly moistened with an
approved contact cleaner.
d. Clean the receptacles and plugs with a hand controlled dry air jet (not more than
25 psi) and a clean lint-free cloth lightly moistened with an approved cleaning
solvent. Wipe dry with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth.
5. 3. 3 SEMICONDUCTOR REPLACEMENT
5. 3.4. 1 GENERAL
-NOTE-
e. Power Supply. When using a battery-type power supply, always use fresh bat-
teries of the proper value. Make certain that the polarity of the power supply is
correct for the equipment under test. Do not use power supplies having poor
voltage regulation.
Page 5-25
KING
KX 170A/KX 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
-CAUTION -
b. PNP Transistor. To check a PNP transistor, connect the positive lead of the
multimeter to the base of the transistor and the negative lead to the emitter.
Generally, a resistance reading of.50, 000 ohms or more should be obtained.
Iteconnect the multimeter with the negative lead to the base. With the positive
lead connected to the emitter a resistance value of 500 ohms or less should be
obtained. When the positive lead is connected to the collector a value of 500 ohms
or less should be likewise obtained.
I.
_ NPN Transistor. Similar tests made on an NPN transistor should produce the
following results: With the negative lead of the multimeter connected to the base
of the transistor. the value of resistance between the base and the collector should
he high. With the positive lead of the multimeter connected to the base, the value
of resistance between the base and the emitter or base and the collector should be
low. If these results are not obtained, the transistor is probably defective and
should be replaced.
5. 3. 5. 3 IIEPLACINC TRANSISTcOltS
a. Never remove or replace a plug-in semiconductor with the supply voltage turned
on.’ Transients thus produced may damage the semiconductor or others remain-
ing in the circuit. If a semiconductor is to be evaluated in an external test circuit,
be sure t.hat no more voltage is applied to the semiconductor than normally is used
in the circuit from which it came.
b. Use only a low heat soldering iron when installing or removing soldered-in-parts.
Use care in the handling of printed circuit boards. When removing a part from a
printed circuit board, first unbend the crimped leads. Use only the necessat’y
amount of heat to unsolder the part. Clear excess solder, from mounting eyelets,
making suI,e that mounting holes are cleat, before installing new parts. When
removing a tl,ansfbrmer or other part having a multiple number of leads, straight-
en (unbend) all Leads first and then heat Leads one at a time, working around the
part; until the part can be gently ‘rocked out’.
e. In some cases, power transistors are mounted on heat-sinks that are designed to
dissipate heat away from them. In some power circuits, the transistor must also
be insulated from ground. Often, this insulating is accomplished by means of
insulating washers made of fiber and mica. When replacing transistors mounted
in this manner, be sure that the insulating washers are replaced in proper order.
Before installing the mica washers, treat them with a film of silicone grease.
This treatment heips in the transfer of heat. After the transistor is mounted, and
before making any connections, check from the case of the transistor to ground
with a multimeter to see that the insulation is effective.
Precision voltage measurements are not needed in testing digital I. C. ‘s other than to
see that the voltage is a HI level or a LO level. An oscilloscope with a calibrated ver-
tical and horizontal axis is normally used in order to measure voltages of short dura-
tion or to measure the relationship of two voltage pulses.
a. A Truth Table of the logic element under question is the primary tool to be used.
When checking input and output levels of a logic element under question it should
be remembered that an input or output may not agree with its truth table not be-
cause it has malfunctioned but because some other component connected to the
same point has shorted to ground or to V,,. This is not uncommon when an out-
put of one element is connected to an input or output of another. It may be nec-
essary to isolate the gate under question by unsoldering the necessary I. C. pins.
A majority of digital I. C. failures can be grouped into three categories.
-CAUTION -
Never remove or replace a plug in I. C. with the supply voltage turned on. Transients
thus produced may damage the I. C. or others remaining in the circuit, If an I. C. is to
be evaluated in an external test circuit, be sure no more voltage is applied to the I. C.
than normally is used in the circuit from which it came.
NO A
El 1 - YES TRANSMITTER CW YES
NAV INDICATION OK NAV AUDIO OK NAV AUDIO OK COMM AUDIO OK COMM AUDIO OK _ - * TRANSMITTER c MODULATION SET MIKE GAIN
YES YES YES YES CW POWER OK AT YES FREO. OK ON ALL YES
ON 113 5 MHZ WITH - W’T” ‘I3 5 MHz * ON ALL KHz120ea) - - ALL KHz (20eo.I E CAPABILITY PDT
- 126.700 MHz
lO2OHZ. 30% NO MHr(l8eo) AND ALL NO OK WITH IKHr
STANDARD NAV. SIG 7 AND ALL MHz ( IO ea): 1 102OH1;30%7 1 1 ALL MHz(l8.a)~
126.700MHz 7 PER SEC. 52.6.2
lVOlCE / IDENT)? KHz FREO (20roI7 - (.I25 VRMS)?
, I
I I I
I?--- NO REPAIR
VOLTAGE I
IN0
CHECK MODULATOR
YES
I INTERCONNECT
ON-OFF SWITCH
1 I CHECK
1 YES
YES
I YES
-I
CHECK NOISE
LIMITER
I- REPAIR
AMPL.
AUDIO
CIRCUITRY IS COMM
I
SMO CHECK I v
NO
Y
NO (I 403)
I
INJECTION
(135.700MHZ)
CORRECT
FREO
7
_YES COMM SMO
PER SEC 5.6
w
.
*
-I
I
ISNAV SMO CHECK NAV. SMO 696-6052-00
NO
INJECTION SEE .
FREOUENCY SEC. 5.5
RECEIVER
I
CHECK COMM
RECEIVER
SECTION 5.7
PER SEC 5.8 I
5.4 TROUBLESHOOTING
THEKX 17OA/KX175
Figure 5-12 is a troubleshooting flow chart designed to aid the technician in sectionalizing
or localizing sources of trouble. NAV and COMM block diagrams Figure 5-48 and 5-49
appearing at the end of Section 5 may also aid in localizing the malfunction. The trouble-
shooting charts (Table 5-5 thru 5-9) are given as a quick guide in pinpointing probable
problem areas along with their associated remedies. A list of possible SMO malfunctions
is given in the Preliminary Evaluation section of the respective SMO discussions (NAV
SMO, Section 5. 5, COMM SMO, Section 5. 6).
Individual circuit tracing and isolation of a defective component is most easily accomp-
lished by use of the individual troubleshooting sections, along with appropriate schematic
diagrams appearing at the end of Section 5.
>ow or no output from Voltage Regulated .Supply Check QlOl, Ql03 and
deceiver Buffer (8. 5 and 5. 0 volts) com- CR214 voltages and
ponent failure. associated components.
Trequency error and/or Phase and Frequency com- Check 1205, 1207 and 1208
itter in Receiver Buffer parator component failure. voltages and associated
,utput., components;
Trequency error in Low Reference Oscillator Check Q210 and Q211 volt
deceiver Buffer output. 400KHz component failure. ages and associated camp
onents.
Jaw or no output from Voltage Regulated Supply Check Q102, Q105, Q104
deceiver Buffer (8. 5 and 5. 0 volts) com- and CR31 9 voltages and
ponent failure. associated components.
deceiver Buffer output Transmit Buffer component Check Q306 voltages and
Nut no Transmit Buffer failure. associated components,
utput in Transmit
:ondition. Transmit Enable Switch Check Q305 voltages and
component failure. associated components.
deceiver Buffer and/or COMM MHz HI;LO switch Check switch wafer S103.
‘ransmit Buffer, fre- wafer.
uency incorrect from
18. 00 to 126. 95MHz Transmit- Receive Relay Check relay K701.
ut OK from 127. 00 to
35MHz or vice versa. High Reference Crystals Check i’301 and Y302 and
associated components,
stable frequency error LOW Reference Oscillator Check for 400KHz input tc
in Receiver and Trans - 400KHz, (in NAV SMO TP305 (from NA\: SIz,lO
nit Buffer output. Kx 170A) (in COMM SMO Kx 170A) (Q315 and Q316
Kx 175). voltages and associated
components KX 175).
Trequency error and/or Phase and Frequency Check 1305, 1307 and 1308
itter in Receiver and Comparator component voltages and associated
rransmitter Buffer output. failure. components.
Frequency error’ and/or Low Reference Oscillator Check for 400KHz input tc
jitter in Receiver and 40OKHz (in NAV SMO KX 170A) TP305. D
rransmitter nuffer output. (in COMM SMO f<X 175)
I Vo VOR/ L,OC signal VOR/ LOC level adjust- Check adjustment of R425
(xltput ment control or output See Alignment Procedure,
coupling capacitor open
Check C443
0 reception from COMM SMO High Freq- Check CR313 and CR314
18. 00 to 126. 95MHz uency crystals bias voltages,
It OK from 127.00
I 135. 95MHz or vice Check Y301 and Y302 and
?rsa. associated components.
Audio weak or distorted Audio output transistors. Check Q703, Q7Q4, Q705 and
Q706 and bias.
JGC circuit inoperative AGC transistors Check Q415 and Q416, CR432
listortion on strong voltages and associated corn.
signals. ponents.
ro transmitter CW output COMM SMO high frequency Check CR313 and CR314 bias
rom 118. 00 to 126. 95MHz reference crystals voltages
ut OK from 12 7. 00 to
35. 95MHz or vice versa COMM SMO HI-LO VCO Check Y301 and Y302 bias
switch voltages and VCO adjustment
C314 and C315. See align-
ment procedure.
iow or no sidetone
Transmit-Receive
Output coupling
relay
capacitor
Check relay
inKX 1701
l
open KX 175B)
5.5 TROUBLESHOOTING
THENAVSMO
The NAV SMO synthesizes 200 frequencies, providing a power level of 1Omw into a 500
load. The relationship of channel frequency to synthesized frequency is illustrated in
Table 5-10. Theory of operation is presented in Section 4. 2.
3. IS the synthesized frequency correct when dialing through all KHZ (20 each)
and all MHz (10 each) positions with both clockwise and counterclockwise
rotation?
1. Check all power and control lines to the NAV SMO for proper operation.
Wire color and feedthru assignments are shown in Figure 5-50.
Control wire functions are defined in Table 4--3 where “0” is ground potential
and “1” is 5vdc.
2. Is there a short circuit in the COMM SMO disabling the 4OOKHz oscillator in
the NAV SMO (KX 170A only)?
-NOTE-
Using a 1Kpf capacitor, connect a VHF frequency counter to the junction of R230 and R231
in the High Reference Oscillator and check for 53. 93125MHz. If the oscillator is inoper-
ative or off frequency, refer to section 5. 5. 11 for servicing information.
Connect a frequency counter to TP205 in the Low Reference Oscillator and measure
400. OOOKHz. Remove the counter coax, connect an oscilloscope to TP205 and observe
the waveform of Figure 5-13. If a malfunction is observed, refer to Section 5. 5. 5 for
servicing instructions.
1 I I
I : : I
-cl2.5ySeCL
. 696-6053-00
Dial 116. 70MHz on the NAV frequency selector and adjust the VCO bias voltage to
6. 50V. Connect a VHF counter to the VCO Buffer, TP203, and adjust L201 to obtain a
frequency of approximately 101. 5125MHz. Erratic or improper tuning, or low output
should be corrected by troubleshooting the VCO and/or VCO Buffer as outlined in
Sections 5. 5. 6 and 5. 5. 10.
Without altering the tuning voltage or the channel frequency setting connect the VHF
counter to TP204 and read a frequency of approximately 50. 756MHz. If a malfunction is
observed, the circuit may be serviced as outlined in the troubleshooting instructions of
Section 5. 5. 12.
With 116. 70MHz selected and 6. 50vdc bias applied to the VCO as in previous steps, con-
nect an oscilloscope to the junction of L204, C240 and C241. The waveform should be of
the approximate amplitude and frequency of Figure 5-14. Failure to obtain the desired
trace would indicate a malfunction in the Mixer circuit which can be serviced as outlined
in the troubleshooting instructions of Section 5. 5. 13.
Vertical: 0. 05V/div
Horizontal: 0. lpsec/div
Selected Freq. : 116. 70MHz
696-6054-00
FIGURE 5-14 MIXER OUTPUT
With the VCO oscillating near 101. 5125MHz (NAV frequency selector at 116. 70MHz)
monitor the Squaring Amplifier output, TP206, with an oscilloscope having a bandwidth
of at least 30MHz. If the high reference oscillator is functioning properly, the wave-
form will appear as in Figure 5-15. If not, troubleshoot the squaring amplifier as in
Section 5. 5. 15.
Vertical: 1’V/DIV
Horizontal: . lpsec/DIV
Selected Freq: 116. 700MHz
Squaring Amp. Freq, : 3. 175MHz
696-6055-00
FIGURE 5-15 SQUARING AMPLIFIER OUT PUT
Short, test points, TP207, TP208, and TP209. This disables the phase and frequency
comparator to permit testing of the programmable counter. Maintain the channel
setting and the VCO tuning voltage of Steps D through G. Attach the oscilloscope probe
to Pin 9 of 1202 or 1206 to monitor the counter output. The waveform of Figure 5-16
should be obtained. Note the pulse period of approximately 40psec. Dial the ten MHz
positions, leaving the VCO bias unchanged, and look for the counter output pulse rate to
increase uniformly as lower channel frequencies are dialed, Return the MHz dial to the
116MHz position and dial through the twenty KHz positions. Observe a gradual advance
in output pulse rate as numbers are dialed from the 0. 95 to . 00 using counterclockwise
rotation.
Horizontal: Spsec/Div
Trace: C250, C248, CR213
Vertical: 2V/Div
696 ~60 56 -00
FIGURE 5-16 PROGRAMMABLE DIVIDER OUTPUT
Connect the oscilloscope probe to the junction of Pins 1, 5 and 10 of 1208 and R215 to
monitor the Phase and Frequency Comparator output. With the channel selector at
116. 70MHz, vary the VCO bias voltage above and below 6. 50 volts. The output voltage
on the scope should be dominately high when the VCO bias is low, and low when the
VCO bias is high. Waveforms are illustrated on the “set-reset” output “Q” of the Phase
and Frequency Comparator Timing Diagrams of Figure 5-33. If a malfunction is noted,
troubleshoot the circuit as illustrated in Section 5. 5. 4.
Repeat the test of Ste,p I but with the oscilloscope probe attached to TP202. Waveforms
are illustrated in Figure 5-17. Service the circuit as required using the reference infor-
mation of Section 5. 5. 8.
Horizontal: 5psec/Div
Upper Trace: Comparator Output (Pins 1, 5, and 10 of
1208)
Upper vertical: lV/Div
Lower Trace: Translator Output (T P202)
Lower Vertical: 2V/Div
696-6057-00
FIGURE 5 - 17 VOLTAGE TRANSLATOR
Troubleshoot the remaining block, the VCO Low Pass Filter per the discussion of
Section 5. 5. 7.
The Programmable Divider consists of integrated circuits 1201, 1202, 1204, 1206 and
gates A and D in 1203. Reference material includes the divider theory of Section 4
and the Timing Diagram of Figure 5-32,
-NOTE-
5. 5. 3. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure.
I. Test Setup
A. ‘Open either end of L204, the Mixer Low Pass Filter choke.
B. Adjust the HP 606A CW level to obtain a crisp square wave (0 volts base
line, 4 volts peak line) at TP206, when viewed by a 30MHz bandwidth or
wider oscilloscope.
C. Dial the NAV channel selector to 116. 70MHz. If comparison techniques are
to be used select either 126. 6OMHz or 135. 70MHz for the COMM channel.
III. Observations
B. Compare the waveform at Pin 6 of the 1204 to the equivalent point in the
COMM SMO or to the timing diagrams. The desired output is a pulse train
with a 4 volt reference level, a 40psec period (25KHz rep ratej, negative
pulse width of approximately 2lOnsec, and 0 volts negative excursion.
E. Failure to meet the requirements of Step C implies a problem with the preset
function of the Programmable Divider, Make a complete check of the divider
flip-flops immediately preceeding and following the preset enable pulse
(negative pulse on Pin 6 of 1204. The desired preset states are defined in
Table 4-3, where 0 is ground and 1 is 5 volts, and should occur immediately
following the preset enable pulse. Also review Figure 5-32.
The Phase and Frequency Comparator consists of integrated circuits 1205, 1207, 1208,
gates C and B of 1203 and wave shaping networks composed of C249, C250, C269, R24’i,
H248 and CR213. Reference information sources include the Phase and Frequency
Comp&ator Timing Diagrams of Figure 5-33 and the theory of Section 4. 2.
-NOTE-
5. 5. 4. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure
A. Connect an external power supply to the VCO bias test point TP201.
C. Adjust the VCO bias voltage low (less than 6. 50 volts) and look for a high out-
put voltage (around 1. 5 volts). Refer to Figure 5-33 for the appropriate timing
diagram.
D. Adjust the VCO bias voltage high (greater than 6. 50 volts) and look for a low
voltage output voltage (near ground potential). Refer to Figure 5-33 for the
appropriate timing.
1. Disable the counter hold pulses by shorting test points TP207, TP208 and
TP209 and check the divide by 16 block (1205) for proper 2, 4, 8 and 16 ripple
counter operation.
2. Check the differentiation networks for proper waveshaping (tie point of C250,
CR213, R248 and the tie point of C249 and R247).
3. Remove the shorting connections at test points TP207, TP208 and TP209.
Repeat the tests of Steps C and D. If proper operation is still not obtained
monitor the gates of the MC817P’s (1207 and 12081 and B and C of 1204 I
for proper operation.
The Low Reference Oscillator consists of transistors Q210 (Q315) and Q211 (Q316),
with crystal Y202 (Y303) as the frequency determining element. The Low Reference
Oscillator serves both the NAV and COMM SMO’s. (KX 170A only).
r
t SYUC I PROGRAMMABLE DIVIDER 1 r-
r--' I I I I lr-
I
I‘,“DL
t-
COMPARATOR
FIGURE 5-19
NAV LOW REFERENCE OSCILLATOR/PROGRAMMABLE DIVIDER/
PHASE AND FREQUENCY COMPARATOR
5. 5. 6. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Compare the supply and bias voltages for Q201
with those appearing in Figure 5-50 and replace components as necessary to obtain pro-
per bias. Apply a 7. 2 volt tuning bias voltage, from a low impedance source, to TP201
and use a frequency counter to monitor the frequency at the collector of Q201. Adjust
L201 to obtain a frequency of approximately 102. 7625. The VCO frequency should vary
proportionately as the tuning voltage is varied. If erratic or erroneous operation is
obtained, check the frequency determining elements. Failure of the VCO to oscillate
implies an open varactor diode (CR201), an open trimmer coil (L201), or a bad transis-
tor (Q201).
The VCO Low Pass Filter consisting of T201, C211, C212 and C213 is an elliptic low
pass filter designed to recover the D-C voltage from the output of the 25KHz Voltage
Translator. It has been factory adjusted and no attempt should be made to readjust in
the field.
The Voltage Translator consists of transistors Q204 and Q205 which shifts the error
voltage level from the Phase and Frequency Comparators to a level sufficient to operate
the VCO.
The Receiver Buffer consists of transistor, Q202, with output transformer, T202.
The VCO Buffer consists of transistor Q203 with output transformer T203. ’
680 C22l
--K-l=
2220
8%
T203'
4203
c220
4201
c216 VCO BUFFER
c204 vco
c205 iv PASS FILTER
L201 T20l
4202
CR201 - czos
cc RZOB
T202 _ Olpl 275
4.
TP201
R215
c212
c211
4204
TP202
C213
T201
Q205
--p-p---- -- e
A
w
T +8.5vDc
A-
T +8cbwc 1 WMT
--
T204
R229
47 R225+2 AMPL.
*
_
c22e
IS00 CR204
10% 9,n CR203
CR206
CR205
4206
I
= HIGH
T206
C239
CR210
CR208
r T 7 7
t5YDC
CR207
CR209
L204
T207
c240
4208
- '4209
,Q207
'Tf206
'Y201
The High Frequency Oscillator consists of transistor Q207 connected in a typical Col-
pitts configuration with crystal Y201 determining the operating frequency.
The Implicit Divide by 2 circuit consists of balanced mixer CR203, CR204, CR205 and
CR206 and amplifier Q206. For circuit theory refer to Section 4, 2.
This is a balanced mixer consisting of transformer T206 and T207 with diodes CR207,
CR208, CR209 and CR210.
5. 5. 13. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. With the power removed from the KX 170A/
KX 175, and using an ohmmeter, check all diodes for a possible open. Check all trans-
former windings for D-C continuity.
The Mixer Low Pass Filter is a basic pi- section low pass filter consisting of inductor
L204 and capacitors C239 and C240.
5. 5. 14. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Using an oscilloscope trace the signal from the
output of the 2nd Mixer (Pin 2 of T206) to the input of the Squaring Amplifier (base Q208).
5.6 TROUBLESHOOTING
THECOMMSMO
The COMM SMO synthesizes 360 frequencies, providing a power level of 1Omw into a
500 load. The relationship of channel frequency to synthesized frequency is illustrated
in Table 5-11. Theory of Operation is presented in Section 4.
LO BAND HI BAND
3. Is the synthesized frequency correct when dialing through all KHz (20 ea. )
and all MHz (18 ea. ) positions with both clockwise and counterclockwise
rotation.
1. Check all power and control lines to the COMM SMO for proper operation.
Wire color and feedthru assignment are shown in Figure 5-51. Control
wire functions are defined in Table 4-4 where “0” is ground and “1” is
SVDC.
2. Does the NAV SMO supply a 400KHz reference to the COMM SMO?
(KX 170A Only)
-NOTE-
Using a 1Kpf coupling capacitor connect a VHF frequency counter to the junction of
CJ301 and CJ302 in the High Reference Oscillator and check for 71. 025 *lKHz when a
low band (118. 00 - 126. 95MHz) frequency, or 66. 525 flKHz when a high band 127. OO-
135. 95MHz frequency has been selected on the COMM frequency dial.
Connect a frequency counter to TP305 and measure 400,000 (+30, -1O)Hz. Remove the
counter, connect an oscilloscope to TP305 and observe the waveform. The proper wave-
form is shown in Figure 5-23 below.
Horizontal: 0. 5psec/div
Vertical: lV/CM
Selected Freq: 126. 70MHz
696 -606 l-00
FIGURE 5-23 LOW REFERENCE OSCILLATOR OUTPUT
Dial 126. 70MHz on the COMM frequency selector, and adjust the VCQ bias voltage to
6. 85V. Connect a VHF counter to the Receiver Buffer, TP303, and adjust C315 to
obtain a frequency of approximately 135. 70MHz.
Change the COMM frequency selector dial to 135. 70MHz and adjust C314 to obtain a
frequency of approximately 126. 70MHz. Erratic or improper tuning, or low output
should be corrected by troubleshooting the VCO and/or VCO Buffer as outlined in
Sections 5. 6. 5 and 5. 6. 9.
Without altering the tuning voltage or the channel frequency setting, connect the VHF
counter to TP304 and read a frequency of approximately 63. 85MHz. Change the COMM
frequency selector dial back to 126. 70MHz and read a frequency of approximately 67. 85
MHz on the counter. If a malfunction is observed, the circuit may be serviced using the
troubleshooting instructions of Section 5. 6. 11.
With 126. 70 selected and 6. 85VDC bias applied to the VCO, as in previous steps, connect
an oscilloscope to the junction of L305, C376 and C377. The waveform should be one of
the approximate amplitude and frequency of Figure 5-24.
Horizontal: 0. lpsec/div
Vertical: . OSV/div
Selected Freq: 126. 70MHz
696 -6062 -00
FIGURE 5-24 MIXER OUTPUT
Failure to obtain the desired trace would indicate a malfunction in the Mixer circuit
which can be serviced using the troubleshooting information of Section 5. 6. 12.
With the VCO oscillating at 135. 70MHz (COMM frequency selector 126. 70MHz), monitor
the Squaring Amplifier output, TP306, with an oscilloscope having a bandwidth of at
least 30MHz. If the reference oscillator is functioning properly, the waveform will
appear as in Figure 5-25, If not, troubleshoot the squaring amplifier as in Section
5. 6. 14.
Horizontal: 0. lpsec/div
Vertical: lV/div
Selected Freq. : 126. 70MHz
696 -6063-00
FIGURE 5-25 SQUARING AMPLIFIER OUTPUT
Short together test points TP307, TP308 and TP309. This disables the phase and fre-
quency comparator to permit testing of the programmable counter. Maintain the channel
setting and the VCO tuning voltage of steps D through G. Attach the oscilloscope probe
to the junction point of C384, CR317, R366 and Pin 9 of 1308 to monitor the counter out-
put. The waveform of Figure 5-26 should be obtained. Note the pulse period of 40psec.
Dial the eighteen MHz positions, leaving the VCO bias unchanged, and look for the count-
er output pulse rate to increase uniformly as lower channel frequencies are dialed.
Return the MHz dial to the 126MHz position and dial through the twenty KHz positions.
Observe a gradual increase in output pulse rate as numbers are dialed from the 0. 95 to
0. 00 using counterclockwise rotation.
- -.
Horizontal: 5ysecldiv
Vertical: 1. OV/div
Selected Freq: 126. 7MHz
696 -6064- 00
Connect the oscilloscope probe to the tie point of Pins 1, 5, and 10 of I308 and R333 to
monitor the Phase and Frequency Comparitor output. With the COMM channel selector
at 126. 70MHz, vary the VCO bias above and below 6. 85 volts. The output voltage on the
scope should be dominately high when the VCO bias is low, and low when the VCO bias is
high. Waveforms are illustrated on the “set-reset” output “Q” of the Phase and Freq-
uency Comparator timing diagrams of Figure 5-33. If a malfunction is noted, trouble-
shoot the circuit as instructed in Section 5. 6. 4.
Repeat the test of Step I but with the oscilloscope probe attached to TP302. Waveforms
are illustrated in Figure 5-27. Troubleshoot the circuit as required using the infor-
mation given in Section 5. 6. 7,
(a) VCP frequency and bias voltage high. (b) VCO frequency and bias voltage low.
Horizontal: lOpsec/div
Vertical: 2V/div
Selected Freq: 126. 70MHz
696 -6065-00
.
FIGURE 5-27 VOLTAGE TRANSLATOR
Service the remaining block, the VCO Low Pass Filter. Compare waveforms with those
of Figure 4-14 and voltage levels of figure 5-51. Check for continuity.
The Programmable Divider consists of integrated circuits, 1301, 1302, 1304, 1306 and
gates A and D in 1303. Reference material includes the divider theory of Section 4. 2 (c)
and the Timing Diagram of Figure 5-32.
-NOTE-
5. 6. 3. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure.
1. Test Setup.
A. Open either end of L305, the Mixer Low Pass Filter choke.
B. Adjust the H/P 606ACW level to obtain a crisp square wave (0 volts base
line, 4 volts peak line) at TP306, when viewed by an oscilloscope having
a 30MHz or wider bandwidth.
C. Dial the COMM channel selection to 126. 70MHz. If NAV SMO comparison
techniques are to be used, select 116. 70MHz for the NAV channel.
III. Observations
B. Compare the waveform at Pin 9 of 1308 to the equivalent point in the NAV
SMO or to the timing diagram (See Figure 5-32). The desired output is a
pulse train with a 2. 5 volt peak level, a 40psec period (25KHz rep. rate),
and 0 volts base line.
The Phase and Frequency Comparator consists of integrated circuits 1305, 1307, 1308,
gates B and C of 1303 and wave shaping networks consisting of C383, C384, CR317, C565,
R366 and R367. Reference information sources include the Phase and Frequency Com-
parator Timing Diagram of Figure 5-33 and the theory of Section 4. 2. 2.
- NOTE -
5. 6. 4. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure
A. Connect an external power supply to the VCO bias test point, TP301.
C. Adjust the VCO bias voltage low (less than 6. 85 volts with 126. 70 or
135. 70MHz selected) and look for a high output voltage (around 1. 5 volts).
Refer to Figure 5-33 for the appropriate timing diagram.
D. Adjust the VCO bias voltage high (greater than 6. 85 volts) and look for a
low output voltage (near ground potential). Refer to Figure 5-33 for the
appropriate timing.
1. Disable the counter hold pulses by shorting test points TP307, TP308,
and TP309, and check the divide by 16 block (1305) for proper divide
by 2, divide by 4, divide by 8 and divide by 16 ripple counter operation.
2. Check the differentiation networks for proper wave shaping (tie point of
C384, CR317, and R366 and the tie point of C383 and R367.
3. Remove the shorting connections at test point TP307, TP308 and TP309.
Repeat the tests of Steps C and D above. If proper operation is still
not obtained, monitor the gates of the MC817P’s (1307 and 1308)and B
and C of the 1304 for proper input/output operation.
I
l 5”DC
PROGRAMMABLE DIVIDER
11 I I III I
I308 t
\
1306\\
-R366
1304
\ -CR317
1302
\ -R333
C383\
-C384
1307\
-TP301
I305\
-TP302
-c315
-R367 MIXER
LOW PASS
FILTER
-c314
TP308
-C565
TP306
.c317
TP309
.CR316 SOUARING AMPL
,CR315
TP305 I 1
CJ302
L305 +>B”DC +3
6”DC
CJ301
TP304 PHASE AND
,,c- c “- w
--y/ ?
696-6067 -00
I 002-0181-00
IR-)
LLOW- REFERENCE -0s~. __ _ _ _
I
I I !
Ir---1 Kltl70. ONLY ’
Ih FROMH*” 9YO (
--------- ----- ---------- J ; 0 4oow1 ,
The Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) consists of transistor Q302, Varactor diode
CR303, with frequency adjust capacitors C314 and C315 and HI-LO VCO switching
transistor Q301. Diodes CR301 and CR302 disable the VCO transistor Q302 when the
COMM frequency selector wafer is dialed to a nonvalid COMM channel. In the low
portion of the COMM band (118. 00-126. 95MHz), the Hi line is grounded on receive and
the “Lo” line is grounded on transmit. Therefore, in receive the “Hi” line forward
biases CR301 applying bias to Q302 for normal operat,ion. CR302 is reverse biased by
R346 (High Reference Oscillator Section). In the high portion of the COMM band (127. OO-
135. 95MHz) the “Lo” line is grounded on receive and the “Hi” line is grounded on trans-
mit. Therefore, in receive the “Lo” line, forward biases CR302 which again applies
bias to Q302. At the same time, the “Lo” line enables VCO switch Q301, placing trim-
mer C314 in parallel with C315. CR301 is reverse biased by R347 (High Reference
Oscillator Section).
The VCO Low Pass Filter consisting of T307, C348, C349, and C350 is an elliptic low
pass filter designed to recover D-C voltage from the output of the 25KHz Voltage
Translator. It has been factory adjusted and no attempt should be made to readjust in
the field.
The Voltage Translator consists of transistors Q308 and Q309 which shift the error
voltage level from the Phase and Frequency Comparator to a level sufficient to operate
the VCO.
The Transmit Buffer consists of Q306 with output transformer T305. It provides drive
to the transmitter only when both the TX Enable Switch, Q305, is turned off and the
Out of Lock Disable switch Q307 is saturated providing an emitter current.path to ground.
4309
c347
4308
TP302
L301
TX. ENABLE SWITCH
I vCO/BUFFER 1308
1 1
c343
CR301
CR302
4307
R346
R347
The High Reference Oscillator consists of transistor Q311 operating in a typical Colpitts
configuration. Crystals Y301 and Y302 determine the operating frequency. In the low
portion of the COMM band (118. 00-126. 95MHz), Y301 is used on receive and Y302 is
used on transmit. In the high portion of the COMM band (127. 00-135. 95MHz), Y302 is
used on receive and Y301 on transmit.
Low Band (118. 00 - 126. 95MHz) High Band (127. 00 - 135. 95MHz)
Receive f = 71. 025MHz Receive f = 66. 525MHz
“Lo” +8. 5V “Lo” GND
“Hi” GND “Hi” +8. 5V
CR314 Reverse Biased CR314 Forward Biased
CR313 Forward Biased C R3 13 Reverse Biased
Check supply and biasing voltages (See Figure 5-51 for typical D-C operating voltage
levels).
The Implicit Divide by 2 circuit consists of balanced mixer CR305, CR306, CR307 and
CR308 and amplifier Q310. For circuit theory refer to Section 4. 2.
This is a balanced mixer consisting of transformers T304 and T306 and diodes CR309,
CR310, CR311 and CR312.
5. 6. 12. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. With the power removed from the KX 170A/
KX 175 using an ohmmeter check all diodes for a possible open. Check all transformer
windings for D - C continuity.
The Mixer Low Pass Filter is a basic pi- section low pass filter consisting of inductor
L305 and capacitors C375 and C376.
gg
+8 ,“UC l .0 5VDC WHT
-
rI ------
I
-----I-*-,
-
I C356 I
FF2-
3000
I
R334 To IYf
100 = t2 AMPL. C367 ^- _-
IOY.
C361
330
R346
I
fT302 CR314 R345 5 6K
I BK 10%
Y
CR306 I - y-’
I
~:,~052255HHt~:::P 9.E
=
.CR305 cR3’3 p,‘za T
=
10%
II
r
.CR308 I c371
REFERENCE 0 Ipf
=:::lsMHz r
osc.
T
,CR307 I
-------I
I
R349
,Q310 I 5K
CR310
CR309
0312
T304 MIXER
LOW PASS
CR312 FILTER
1352
TP304 3 OK
SQUARING AMPL.
II------- 12p7LKEusT
-1
INPUT
CLOCKPULSE
----------- ---------
(PIN 2 9020)
50KHz FLIP
FLOP OUTPUT ------- -----------
a (PIN 7 9020)
QO
PIN 15
-------
Ql -------
KHz PIN 14
9300
-------
I Q2
PIN 13
Q3
PIN I2
-------
KHz 9004
(PIN 8)
QO
PIN I5
Ql
MHZ PIN 14
9300
I
Q2
PIN I3
Q3
PIN 12
LOAD
STATE
/ e,
SELECTED FREQUENCY: COMM- 126.700 OR 135.700 MHz, NAV- I 16.700 MHz
EXPANDED CORRESPONDING DIVIDE RATIO- 127 696-6070-00
SCALE
200 KHz
9989 PIN 5
100 KHz
+I6 9989 PIN 4
50 KHz
9989 PIN 3
25KHz REF
9989 PIN 2
25KHz REF
RESET INPUT
(MC817P(8) PIN 6
COUNTER OUTPUl
9004 PIN6 I I I
1 I! 1
xfDFS,RED <
COUNTER OUTPUT
SET INPUT 11 I/II II- I.
(MC817P(8) PIN91
SET-RESET
OUTPUT a
(MC817P(8) PIN51
I-J ~- l-----:Irr~Lu iI II
PHASE ESTABLISHED TO GIVE PROPER
VCO BIAS TO MAINTAIN PHASE LOCK
VOLTAGE
TRANSLATOR
OUTPUT
(TP302 /202) ill
LOW PASS
FILTER OUTPUT 3Volts Ref. Ref.
(TP301/201) DC DRIVES fVCO TO -MAINTAIN DC DRIVES fVC0 LOW DC DRIVES fVCO HIGH
696-6071-00
PHASE LOCK
5.7 TROUBLESHOOTING
THENAVRECEIVER
Receiver schematic diagram Figure 5-52.
b. Connect an oscilloscope to the detector TP403 and determine that the out-
put is approximately 1. 7 volts peak-to-peak. If so the failure is in audio
processing, (go to step f). If not, the failure is between the R-F input and
the detector (go to step cl.
0. TP406
t- OUTPUT VOLTAGE
d. Check the detector for .proper operation. Connect TP412 to ground, dis-
abling the AGC Amp. Apply 4. OVdc to AGC test point TP406 to provide
receiver quieting. Inject a. 7Vrms 1. 1857MHz signal having 300/o, 1KHz
amplitude modulation to the base of detector transistor Q404 as shown
(Figure 5-35).
a
Page 5-90 March, 1971
KING
KX l’IOA/KX 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
The tests might logically proceed stage by stage from the detector toward
the RF Amp section. An alternative procedure is to choose a point in the
middle of the gain chain for the initial test and proceed toward the front
end, if the test is passed, or toward the detector if the test has failed. When
the malfunctioning stage is identified, proceed to the specific maintenance
information dealing with that portion of the circuit. Refer to the index.
f. Trace the audio signal through the audio processing network to locate the
malfunctioning stage. Refer to 5. 7. 8.
c417
TP402
T404
%!i
T403
I NAV. PRESELECTOR RF AMPL. BALANCED c415
L402 MIXER T402
3 3yh
CR406
15.1875MHr , 1st IF CR407
r----- 2:nd MIXER
CR405
1403 1 CR404
T401
L405
R403
62K
5%
--_--_ KX 1700. ONLY
c414
CR403
c411
IK
5%
%i
c407
L403
CR402
RED TUNING VOLTAGE L402
f
CR401
c401
d
, L 0. FROM NAV SMO
L401
The NAV preselector is a three pole filter, consisting of three variable inductors L401,
L403 and L405 in conjunction with varactors CR401, CR402 and CR403 and fixed capac-
itors C401, C407 and C414. The varactors are tuned by a voltage supplied from the
NAV SMO.
. -.
Txe-ga-in of RF Amplifier Q401, is reduced by applying an increasing, positive AGC
voltage to thebase.
--..
5. 7. 2. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Check for correct tuning voltage. (See tuning
voltage chart, Section 5. 2. 3 Table 5-3. ) Check for RF signal at base of Q401. If no
signal appears at Q401, check for RF signal at the input coaxial cable and the top of
L403. Check coupling inductor L402 and capacitor C408. If signal appears at the base
of Q401, check for RF signal at the top of L405. If no signal appears, check RF Amp-
lifier Q,401, coupling capacitor C411 and associated circuitry (See Figure 5-32 for
operating voltage levels).
The balanced mixer consists of T401, T402 and CR404 through CR407. The R-F signal
is connected to pin 4 of T401 and the synthesizer injection to pin 4 of T402. The IF
signal appears on pin 2 of T402.
The first 1-I‘ consists of a four pole crystal filter (KX 175/KX 175B only) or 2 pole
crystal filter (KX 170A/KX 170B only). Capacitors C415 and C417 provide matching to
the first and second mixers respectively. Transformers T403 and T404 provide proper
reactive terminations to the filter.
+a 5VDC +a SVDC
1.1857MHr 2nd IF
1.1857MHz 2nd IF T 1.1857Ml-l~ 2nd IF
R409 c419 c424 C428
CR410
---
i
+
C436
T_ 0 Id IOK
R421
- C425
To
= IYf
C4lb
.a2
-T
~-
I== r
AGC
te5VDC
C44R
-GiiiK-
NAV.
AGC
’
,. 33
0
NAV 2nd L.O.
696-6075-00
FIGURE 5-37 NAV 2ND LOCAL OSCILLATOR, 2ND MMER, AND 2ND I. F.
The second Local Oscillator consists of a transistor Q408 operating as a Pierce oscillator
with crystal, Y401, determining its operating frequency (14. 0018MHz).
The second mixer consists of a transistor, Q403, to which both the R-F signal and the
Local Oscillator injection are coupled into the base.
The second I-F consists of three pairs of double tuned filters T405-T406, T407-T408,
T409-T410, with I-C Amplifiers 1401 and 1402 providing selectivity and I-F gain, AGC
voltage is applied to 1401. The second I-F is tuned to 1. 1857MHz. Refer to section
4. 4. 2. 8 for AGC theory.
+a 5VDC
1
1 T
R422
47K
5% AMPL.
ISOLATION a407
I AGC
TP406
32r2 4K
5%
CR411
R429
IOK :E1412
&
c439
.22”f , c440
2ov IO”1
YEL /GRh
I\ 0 VOR/LOC OUT
+E SVDC I
t444
---- N AM 50 NAV AUDIO AMPL.
COMM. -1
I.
SPARE 26
I
I
I
TO
FRONT
WNEL
KX 170A/KX 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
The detector consists of transistor Q404 which is operated in the collector detection
mode by the trickle bias supplied by CR410. Isolation amplifier Q405 is an emitter
follower which prevents the noise limiter from loading the detector. For a detailed
description of the noise limiter see paragraph 4. 3. 2. 6.
For the noise limiter, first check the emitter of Q405 for a detected audio signal. Using
an oscilloscope, check the audio at the junction of CR411 and C439. If no audio exists,
check CR411 for an open or reverse biased condition. (See Figure 5-52 for operating
voltage levels).
The output of the isolation amplifier is filtered (and phase shifted) by the filter network
R431, C444, R432 and C441 and applied to the base of AGC amplifier Q406. Q406 com-
pares this voltage with the AGC threshold reference appearing at the junction of RT502
and R434 and amplifies the difference voltage in conjunction with Q407.
For a motorboating AGC system,check capacitors C441 and C442 for either a capacitance
change or an open circuit to the capacitor.
The NAV Ident Filter consists of a parallel L-C trap using fixed capacitor, C716 and a
variable inductor L703 to tune the filter to 1020Hz. A switch, Slll located on the trans-
ceiver front panel disables the ident filter by directly shorting across the L-C network
when in-the “Ident” position.
Generator with a variable frequency audio generator. As the audio frequency range is
scanned, a definite dip should be observed in the audio output at the resonate frequency
of the filter. The dip should be observed in the audio output at the resonate frequency
of the filter. If the dip is slightly removed from 1020Hz (use a counter to measure the
audio frequency if available) realignment may be necessary. If no dip is observed and
the above tests have proven satisfactory, check C716 for an open circuit or an incorrect
value.
The NAV Audio Amplifier consists of a decoupled-regulated supply voltage (Zener diode
CR414), I-F audio amp 1403, and output transformer T411. The NAV Audio Volume
Control, RlOl, is located on the transceiver front panel.
5. 7. 11. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Check the D-C operating voltage levels of the
Audio Amplifier 1403 (See Figure 5-52). If the D-C levels are OK, trace the audio from
the ident filter thru the NAV Volume Control RlOl (NAV Volume Control should be all
the way clockwise) to Pin 10 of 1403. To check transformer T411, with an oscilloscope
look at Pins 4 and 7 of 1403 to see if a signal exists. If so, and it does not appear at
Pin 35 of 5171, check T411 for an open secondary winding or the yellow-orange wire for
an open circuit.
KX 170A/KX 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
5.8 TROUBLESHOOTING
THECOMMRECEIVER
Receiver schematic diagram Figure 5-52.
b. Connect an oscilloscope to the detector TP410 and determine that the output
is approximately 1. 0 volts peak-to-peak. If so the failure is in audio pro-
1cessing (go to step f). If not the failure is between the R-F input and the
detector (go to step c).
C. Determine if the failure is within the AGC AMPL. Connect a variable volt-
age power supply to TP413 through a 1Kn resistor. Compare the input
voltage to output voltage relationship with the typical data of Figure 5-39.
TP411
POWER OUTPUT
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
2.4-3.7VDC
INPUT VOLTAGE
INPUT VOLTAGE
696 -6077 -00
If reasonable correlation-is obtained, disconnect the power supply and proceed to step
d. If not, repair the AGC amplifier.
The tests might logically proceed stage by stage from the detector toward
the RF AMPL. section. An alternative procedure is to choose a point in the
middle of the gain chain for the initial test and proceed toward the front
end, if the test is passed, or toward the detector if the test has failed.
When the malfunctioning stage is identified, proceed to the specific main-
tenance information dealing with that portion of the circuit. Refer to the
index.
f. Trace the audio signal through the audio processing network to locate the
malfunctioning stage. Refer to 5. 8. 8.
c468
L407
c469
CR416
CR417
L408
L409
c475
--- ------- c474
%i
\I/I
c47.a
150
L4l2
1 IpL L411
L412
CR418
CR419
C481
L413
CR422
T412
CR421
CR423
T413
CR420
C482
T414
C467
FL403
T415
4413
-TP409
-C483
-
696 -6079 -00
The COMM preselector is a four pole filter, consisting of four variable inductors L407,
L409, L411 and L413 in conjunction with varactor CR416, CR417, CR418, CR419 and
fixed capacitors C469, C474, and C481. The varactors are tuned by a tuning voltage
obtained from a COMM MHz tuning wafer (S102).
The R-F Amplifier Q411 provides RF gain which is reduced by an increasing AGC volt-
age to the base,
Balanced mixer components include T412, T413, and CR420 through CR423. The R-F
signal is connected to pin 4 of T412 while the COMM SMO receiver injection is applied
to pin 4 of T413. The resultant 1st IF signal appears on pin 2 of T413.
The first I-F consists of a two pole crystal filter (.KX 170A/KX 175/KX 170B only) or a
six pole crystal filter (KX 175B only) tuned to 9.OOOOMHz. (T414, T415 and FL403 or
FL405, FL406 and FL407, KX 175B only).
The second mixer consists of a transistor, Q413, to which both the R-F signal and the
L. 0. inje’ction are coupled into the base.
The second I-F consists of three pairs of double tuned filters T416-T417, T418-T419,
T420-T421, with I-C amplifiers 1404 and 1405 providing selectivity and I-F gain. AGC
voltage is applied to 1404. The second I-F is tuned to 861. 25KHz. Refer to section
4. 3. 2. 7 for ‘AGC theory.
W’
?‘/r
R455
100 ia 51,u
1456
47
T
+B.SVDC
-T421
-T420
2.0 861.25KHz 2nd IF c481
6.3 I
861.25KHt 2nd IF
498
$6
L415
24Duh
-1405
-T419
-T418
'1404
sY402
'T417
4409
T414
T416
C467
4413
TP409
FIGURE 5-42 COMM 2ND L. 0.. 2ND MIXER, 2ND I. F., AND DETECTOR
(Dwg. No. 696-6080-00)
Rev. 2, December, 1972 Page 5-113
KING
KX 170A/KX 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
WHT/ORN
DETECTOR .~~a(3
0414 - C465
Q410
C466
c499
CR426
AOC I WHT/BLU
CSll
+R SVDC
%
CR431U tI/ WHT/BLU
TO COMM VOLUME CONTROL
T421
WI07 I ~SOUELCH GATE I\
IOU g Y$f
5% u WI-IT/VI0 CR42 7
TO SOUELCH TEST SWITCH
CR430.’
4414
TP410
R487
Q416
c495
R486
GRY/WHT
c497 ’
Page 5-116
Rev. 2, December, 1972
KING
KX 170A/KX 175
NAVIGAT ION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
The detector consists of transistor Q414 which is operated in the collector detection mode
by the trickle bias supplied by CR426. For a detailed description of the noise limiter see
paragraph 4. 3. 2. 6.
For noise limiter operation, first check TP410 for a detected audio signal. Using an
oscilloscope, check the audio at the junction of CR427 and C499. If no audio exists,
check CR427 for an open or reverse biased condition. (See Figure 5-52 for operating
voltage levels).
The detector output is filtered by the filter network R487 and C495 and applied to the base
of AGC amplifier Q415. Q415 compares this voltage with the AGC threshold reference
appearing at the junction of R485 and R486 and the voltage difference controls AGC
transistor Q4 16.
For a motorboating AGC system, check capacitors C495 and C497 for either a cap-
acitance change or an open circuit to the capacitor.
The COMM audio preamplifier consists of transistor Q410 operating as a Class A Audio
stage. The COMM Audio Volume Control R102 is located on the transceiver front panel.
If audio is present at the volume control coax but not on the white-orange
audio out line, check coupling capacitors C466 and (‘465. If audio exists at the base of
Q410 but not the collector, check Q410 and associated circuitry. (See Figure 5-52 for
operating voltage levels. )
The basic squelch gate consists of gating diode CR43i and squelch reference network
R508 and R509. As long as CR431 is forward biased (i. e., The cathode is dropped to
a lower D-C potential than the anode squelch reference voltage), the diode acts as an
A-C short circuit and audio passes from the noise limiter, through C499, CR431 and
C511 to the COMM Volume Control. If CR431 is reverse biased (i. e., The cathode vol t-
age is held at a lower positive D-C potential than the anode squelch reference voltage),
the diode acts as an A-C open circuit and no audio is allowed to pass.
Under normal operation, there are three conditions which will give an unsquelched
receiver; the squelch test switch in test position, carrier to noise squelch gating and
carrier squelch gating.
‘J‘he noise amplifier and filter consist of the noise amplifier Q419 and the elliptic filter
formed by C503, (“502, (J501, 1,414, 11500 and the input impedance of Q419. The filter
rejects frequencies below 7Kl-Iz and the amplifier is used to amplify the filtered noise
at)ove this frequency,
The carrier to noise squelch consists of transistor Q420 and C‘R429 in conjunction with
capacitor C508. For a detailed description of operation see Section 4. 3. 2. 9. The basic
operation is that with no signal input, noise is amplified in transistor Q420, and a volt-
age is developed across C508 which biases squelch gate (‘R431 off. With an input signal,
noise is reduced and the voltage developed across C508 drops allowing CR431 to become
forward biased.
The carrier squelch consists of the differential amplifier pair Q417 and Q418. Its prin-
ciple operation is to compare the AGC voltage with a preset carrier squelch reference
voltage (Potentiometer R495). ‘When the AGC.voltage becomes greater than this ref-
erence voltage, Q418 turns on and forward biases squelch gate diode CR431.
5. 8. 14. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Check the voltage reference string R494, R495
and R496 for continuity. Check for differential amplifier operation of Q417 and Q418.
When an R-F signal is applied to the receiver (above 151.l~ hard) the AGC voltage on the
base of Q418 should turn it on pulling its collector voltage down and allowing Squelch
Gate diode CR431 to turn on. For ‘approximate D-C operating levels, refer to Figure
5-52. It should be noted there that the given D-C operating voltage levels for the
carrier squelch are only approximate as they are dependent upon the quiescent AGC
level and will vary between units. They are given for comparison purpose only.
'R496
R483
R495
R500
c501
TP410
R494
c503
L414
c502
4419
4420
/CR429
-c499 * '.""I
35v
-C508 CARRIER I NOISE
-RR507 CW CARRIER
CARRIER _ ~OUELCH
-R506
-CR431
-R509
-R508
-cc511
TO COMM VOLUME CONTROL
696-6082-
5.9 TRDUBLESHOOTING
THEAUDIOAMPL (Schematic Diagram Figure 5-53)
The summing junction consists of resistor network R703 thru R707 and R722. Besides
a COMM receiver audio input, it provides up to four external auxilary inputs with approx-
imately 30db of isolation between any two of the external inputs (6OOn).
The T-R Diode switch consists of switching diodes CR701 and CR702 along with associa-
ted bias circuitry. For receive condition, the audio mute line is open eliminating any
D-C current path to CR701. This, in effect reverse biases CR701 and forward biasing
CR702.
For transmit operations the audio mute line is grounded by K701 allowing CR701 to be-
come forward biased thru R701 and R721, This pulls the anode of CR702 low causing it
to become reverse biased. Thus, summing junction audio is blocked while the mike
audio line is coupled thru C714, CR701 and C705 into the Audio Pre-Driver Amplifier
Q701.
The Audio Pre-Driver Amplifier, Q701 operates as a Class A audio stage. It is used in
both the transmit and receive modes.
The Audio Driver Amplifier Q702 operates as a Class A audio stage having coupling
transformer T701 as its output load. Distortion is reduced and gain stabilized with the
use of feedback network R718, R713 and C715.
The Audio Output Amplifier consists of T701, T702 and Q703-Q706. It operates as a
conventional transformer coupled Class B Push-Pull Output Stage. It is used for rec-
eiver audio output and as a modulator for the transmitter.
5. 9. 5. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Check fuse F701 to make sure it has not blown.
The output circuits receive their supply voltage through this fuse. Check transformers
T701 and T702 (open windings - no D-C voltages). Check Q703-Q706 for proper oper-
ation. (See Figure 5-53 for operating voltage levels. )
J171 r
“,F’
~-~-~------~~~- 1 AUDIO
R707
I OUTPUT
AMPL
Al
T-R DIODE PI
SWITCH AMPL.
c7
c709- -R721 FROM VOLT
REG. DIODE @ wHT +’ OVDc +B.OVDC
C706- R702 JUNCTION
R702 c R707
-R726 ‘r /It F7Ol CR70T
5A I CR704
A L,
R721 m
2 2K I AUCiO MUTE (WHT/GRYl
I I I
,706 ( MIC. AUDIO (GRYI
R7 ‘20 MC KEY LGRY/WHT)
39
1 40
R706 COMM SW BUSS wnr1
17
COMM AK BUSS (REDI
R707 70
--
R704 Imh - 21
_NAV. 13.75VDC INPUT IrEL) =
-.
R705 R727 F701 - ‘~~~
C713
6ROyf
250P”
NOT USED IN KY 195 y 25v
5.10 TROUBl.ESHOOTING
THETRANSMITTER (Schematic Diagram Figure 5-53)
The Buffer Amplifier, Q601, operates as a Class A R-F amplifier. It receives its R-F
drive from the COMM SMO but is active only in the transmit mode when 13. 75V is sup-
plied to its collector thru relay K701, and the COMM SMO Transmit Buffer (Q306) is
activated.
5. 10. 1. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Check for R-F excitation from the COMM
SMO at the coaxial cable input. Using a high frequency oscilloscope (being careful not
to load the circuit) check for an R-F signal on the base of QSOl. Check for R-F signal
at the collector of &Sol. If no signal is present, check Q601 and associated circuitry
(see Figure 5-53 for operating voltage levels).
5. 10. 2. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Check for R-F drive from Q601. If an R-F
signal is present on the base of Q602, but not on the collector, check Q602 and associat-
ed circuitry (See Figure 5-53 for operating voltage levels).
The Driver Amplifier, Q603, is operated as a Class A-B, R-F Amplifier. It is coll-
ector modulated, receiving a modulated supply voltage thru K701. The resistor and
Liiode combinations CR601-R608 and CR602-R615 are chosen to linearize modulation by
allowing full upward modulation but limiting the downward modulation of Q603.
5. 10. 3. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Check for R-F drive from Q602. If an R-F
signal is present at the base of Q603 but not at the collector, check Q603 and its associa-
ted circuitry (See Figure 5-53 for D-C operating voltage levels). If no modulation occurs
on the collector, check the modulated supply voltage from K701 for proper modulation
level, check resistor-diode combinations (R608-CR601 and R615-CR6021 for open cir-
cuits short circuits or incorrect component value.
The Final Amplifier Q604 is operated as a Class C R-F amplifier. It is also collector
modulated, receiving its modulated supply voltage thru K701 in the transmit mode only.
It receives both upward and downward modulation.
5. 10. 4. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Check for R-F drive from Q603. If an R-F
signal is present at the base of Q604 but not the collector, check Q604 and its associated
circuitry (See Figure 5-53 for D-C operating voltage levels). If no modulation occurs
on the collector of Q604, check the modulated supply voltage from K701 for proper mod-
ulation level.
The Low Pass Filter is a 3-section elliptical filter designed to reduce the harmonic out-
put of the power amplifier. The T-‘R Diode Switching is accomplished with diodes CR603
and CR.604. In the receive mode, a positive bias voltage is applied to diodes CR603 and.
CR604 thru resistors R616 and R6 17. The received signal is coupled from the antenna
thru the 3rd pole and diode CR604, to the COMM receiver. Diode CR603 and R-F by-
pass capacitor C626 provide a terminating device to minimize the insertion loss.
In the transmit mode, the D-C bias voltage is removed from the resistor, diode com-
bination by relay K701 and the R-F power from the transmitter reverse biases diodes
CR603 and CR604 due to self-rectification.
FL602
CR604
TRANSMITTER
C601
R617 470 R604
C626
FL601 COMM
ANT
R601
3 9K
2 i
4604
CR602 t ”
Rg?
5%
,,,;
47K y 1- 7‘-
I22 - _ I33
CT\
1 i C632
=
33
4603 FINAL
R612 AMPL. I
68
R615 BUFFER 5% ll2W CR603~~
PRE-DRIVER ::
AMPL.
AMPL. DRIVER C626
L--P- AMPL. - ------
CR601 ---
R608
4602
4601
CR102.
NAV +8.51
Q103-
QlOl.
NAV +13.75-
l-cl-l
PI03
696 -6085-00
5.11 TROUBLESHOOTING
THEREGULATORS
5. 11. 1 COMM 8. 5 VOLT REGULATOR (Figures 5-47 and 5-54)
A complementary configuration using two transistors (QlO2 and Q105) as a series pass
element was selected to enhance low supply voltage operation. Transistor Q104 provides
negative feedback to the base of Q105.
5. 11. 1. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. If no output, check for 13. 75V input on orange-
white wire. If 13. 75V is present, disconnect the orange-grey wires (3 total) and the
white (2 wires). Check the collector of Q102 for 8. 5V. If this has corrected the pro-
blem, replace wires one at a time to isolate the shorted assembly. Erroneous or
erratic adjustment, necessitates checking R130-R132, CR103 and R125.
If output is high (13. 75V), check for shorted transistor QlO2, Q105 or an open conn-
ection to Q104.
5. 11. 2. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. If no output, check for 13. 75V input on yellow/
white wire. If 13. 75V is present, disconnect the grey (3 total) wires, and white (2 total)
wires, and check the collector of QlOl for 8. 5V. If this has corrected the problem,
replace wires one at a time to isolate the shorted assembly. Check the voltage at zener
diode CR102 (approximately 9. 1V).
If output is high, check for shorted transistor QlOl or Q103 or open connection on
zoner CR102.
5.12 TROUBLESHOOTING
THEWA39 VOLTAGE
REGULATOR (Figure 5- 56)
The KA 39 Voltage Converter contains dual series regulators converting 27. 5Vdc to
13. 75Vdc. The COMM regulator, “A”, incorporates reference element CR101 and the
Darlington series pass configuration consisting of QlOl and Q102. Protection from
reverse voltage connections and negative transients is provided by diode CR102.
Capacitor Cl01 suppresses spurious oscillations which might otherwise appear with
reactive loads. The NAV regulator, “B” functions electrically in the same manner as
the “A” regulator.
DME
VO+?/LOC
- G S. CONTWX
I PROGdd%ABLEtl - - AM
-
r
: TO 2 POLE
corn
.SM 1.1857M-b
t t
.“cD 1 :. D-c-. .. :. ,. : .‘. -. .“.
F.'. .. .' 25KHr --.
: vco
VOLTAGE -----c vco - : ., BUFFER
.. TRANSLATOR .-
-i’-
:
il. _ :. --_
,-- OiEk-LOOP
, -TEST POINT
/ . ..-. -.
::
IVE
I I NAV AUDIO
I--- CRYSTAL
FILTER
15.1675MHz
14 OOl8MHz 1
1 1 1
vA~,RAc;~ l RF AMP
“ARACTOR I
BALANCED
IST MIX -
XTAL 2 POLE
- FILTER FILTER -- 2”d M’X - FILTER l IF AMP
(2 POLE,
(2 POLEI SMHZ 86125KHZ
t t t t I
I I
A
2 POLE
FILTER
sM.*5KH*
- LOW PASS -
POWER AMP
1.F AMP
SPEAKER
SIDETONE
RESISTOR tOPTK)NAL)
SPEAKER ON
A”CKJ
XMIT KEY -
HEADPHONE,
SIDETONE
L-
696-6087-00
INPUTS
14.0
I
KA-39 CONVERTER
I
I- m e - - - -I
l USED ON ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
069-1016-00
DRAWING NO. 300-0419-00
006-0057-00 IK MANUAL 1
008-0004-00 LUG GROUND #4 1
008-0005-03 LUG GROUND 2
012-1006-00 TAPE COATED LACING
016-1015-00 ADHESIVE
016-1038-00 SPRAY ADHESIVE
035-101 l-00 END CAP SHIPPING 2
035-1013-04 SHIPPING BAG PLAST 1
Rl 035-1031-00 SHIPPING CARTON 1
047-1728-01 COMM COVER 1
047-1729-01 COVER PA 1
047-1730-02 LEFT SIDE RAIL 1
047-1731-02 RIGHT SIDE RAIL 1
047-1737-0.1 NAV COVER 1
Rl 047-1747-00 TOP CDVER 1
047-1943-00 CLIP SPRING 1
047-2267-02 COVER BOTTOM 1
047-2268-01 SHIELD PA@ (MIXER) 2
047-2269-01 SHIELD PAD (OSCJ 1
047-2293-01 SHIELD PAD 1
Rl 047-2327-01 COVER EOlJIPMENT 1
057-1210-00 PATENT LABEL 1
057-1344-01 SERIAL NLJMBER TAG 1
076-0339-00 SPACER 6
089-2105-22 NUT SPEED NO 4 8
089-2140-00 NUT ESNA f14 2
R1 089-5878-04 SCR PPH 4-40X1/4 2
R1 089-5878-13 SCR PHP 4-40X13/16 7
089-5899-04 SCR PPH 2 56X1/4 4
089-5903-04 SCR PPH 4-40X1/4 7
089-6008-03 SCR PFH 4 40X3/16 10
089-6008-04 SCR PFH 4-40X1/4 12
089-6167-05 SCR FHP 6-32X5/16 4
089-6258-04 SCR PFH 4-24X1/4 8
091-0118-03 INSULATOR 2
091-OllR-04 INSIJLATDR 1
091-0118-05 FISHPAPER 1
150-0020-10 TUBING TEF CLR 18 .2
187-1011-00 C INER RlJBRER 2
200-0082-00 REAR PLATE ASSY 1
200-0249-00 NAV/COMM BOARD SA 1
200-0250-00 REAR DIVIDER SA 1
200-0251-00 COMM SMO SA 1
200-0252-00 NAV SMO SA 1
200-0253-00 SWITCH HEAD SA 1
.JOTE: R indicates revision, See page 6-2A for revision and new parts.
0
Rev. 2, December, 1972 Page 6-l
ASSEMBLY NO. 069-1016-00 PAGE 2
DESCRIPTION KX175
IJNIT KX175
a
REVISION 14
USED ON ASSEMBLY 069-1016-00
ASSEMBLY DRAWING ,NO. 300-0419-00
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-4A for revision and new parts.
Rev. 4, ,January, 1976 Page 6-3
:.
ASSEMBLY NO. 200-0254-00 PAGE 2
DESCRIPTION FRONT PLATE SA
IJNIT KX175
REVISION 14
USED ON ASSEMRLY O69-1016-00
ASSEMBLY DRAWING NO. 300-0334-00
.:
Page 614A Rev. 4, January, 1976
KI G
KX 170A r KX
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
- , ,0895569-03(REF,)
,’
029-0096-02
029.0096.Ol(KXl70A/I75)
029.0096-02IKYl95)
090-0170-OOtREF)
089-8023-30
om-0141-OOII)
.I,._?. r
088-0141.OO(l1’ -.-.‘“” ’c 0
I&n nnln
/047-2342-OO(KX 175)
047-235%OO(KX 17OA)
047-2360.OO(KY 195)
NOTE 7
088-0125-O&
078-0024~00
NV I t
1. THIS PORTION OF THE KX~ 175
FACE PLATE ASSEMBLY MAY
-.,” ““I.,, \
BE ORDERFD UNDER ONE NUMBER
IF NECFSSARY /
IJSE K’NG PART NUMBER ZOO-0254.00/01/02 i- 090-00l9-01~2;.’ ,&R j
2. RIOI AND ITS RELATED HARDWARE ARE NOT ON KY 195.
3 FOR GEAR ASSEMBLY AND PERM. INSTALLED ITEM,REFER TO SHT. 2
4. ALL SCREWS AND NUTS NOT SECURED BY LOCKWASHER SHALL BE
LIQUID STAKED USING BLUE GLYPTAL.
5. TORQUE REQUIREMENTS AFTER SHAFTS AND DETENTS HAVE B 089-2106-30(2)
PROPERLY ASSEMBLED AND LUBRICATED ROTATE EACH SHAFT
SEVERAL REVOLUTIONS, THEN MEASURE TORQUE.
TOUOUE RANGE: 22-28 ,N:OZ. 73-0085-OO(2)
6. APPLY A LIMITED AMOUNT OF LUBRICANT(016-1016-00) 073-0123-01 I21
WHERE NOTED.
7 ACTIVATE ADHESIVE BACK OF INSERTS WITH 016-1033-00
’
TRICHLOROETHYLENE ACTIVATOR ( ITEM 57) .A
073-0053.OO(2)
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-9A for revision and new parts
Ke.v. 1 January, 1972 Page 6-7
ASSEMBLY NO. 200-0253-00 PAGE 2
DESCRIPTION SWITCH HEAD SA
UNIT KX175
REVISION 8
USED ON P,SSEMBLY 069-1016-00
ASSEMBLY DRAWING NO. 300-0333-00
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-9A for revision and new parts
Page 6-8 Rev. 2, December, 1972
ASSEMBLY NO. 200-0253-00 PAGE 3
DESCRIPTION SWITCH HEAD SA
(INIT KX175
REVISIDN 8
(ISED ON ASSEMBLY 069-1016-00
ASSEMBLY DRAWING NC). 300-0333-00
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6- 10 for r: -ision aild new parts.
I
Rev. 2, December, 1972 Page 6-9
0
0
Parts List Revision Record
c
ACTION SYMBOL PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
076-0298-05 -, -..,
-NOTES:
I. 0 NEARSIDE TERM.
2. ; FARSIDE TERM.
3. ‘.I SWITCHES READ FROM LEFT SIDE OF UNIT
rPll8
/- PI08
PI09
-PI10
~031-0107-00 L031-0106-00
5102 SlO3
200-0575-04
PI26
PI46 PI62
PI36
Pl25--, 7 r PI37
7
.Pl56
PI34 PI61
/ \CRIll
tSlSD6~ RzE& I;;ACK
200-0575-01 200-0573-02
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-21A for revision and new parts.
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-22 for revision and new parts.
Page 6-18 Rev. 4; January, 1976
ASSEMBLY ND. 200-024A-00 PAGE 3
DESCRIPTION NAV SMO BOARD SA
UNIT KX175
REVIS ION 11
USED ON ASSEMBLY 200-0252-00
ASSEMBLY DRAWING NO. 300-0325-00
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-22 for revision and new parts.
R225 .R230
R224 .R231
R.229 :g;
R226
R228 'R232
R227 'R242
R244 .R260
R245 R233
R221 a.237
R220 R-243
R205 R236
P222 R239
R204 R241
R223 R240
R219 R238
R218 'R247
R202 R215
R203 R248
R2r7 R255
tiO6 R254
R216 R252
R201 R253
R207 R257
R209 R-250
R208 R249
R258 R251
RzlO R256
R212
R211
R213
R214
R259
193-00
4206
L203
T206
CR204
T205
CR203
CJ201
T204
CR206
CR.205
Y202
T203
L201
L206
CR201
%a022
L207
No Change
076-0343-OO.,
076-0165-09
089-5878-05
076
200-0248-00
091-0088-01
\
46
1 089-5874-03 300-0332-00 (R-0)
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-35 for revision and new parts,
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-35 for revision and new parts.
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page.6-35 for revision and new parts.
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-35 for revision and new parts. a
l NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-35 for revision and new parts.
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-35 for revision and new parts.
C318
c304
C308
C342
C565
C383. 3
C320
C564\-
C316
c309 C387
c34o.w c314
C327 c333
C382
c351
C569.y
c379
C380
cj7i
C368 i
c373-
c370-
c371-
cs74\ \/;a
’ C360
/ / \ \ \ \ \ \ C3;6 ‘-c357
696-6095-00
C36/6 C3i6 C3:6 C5168 C3165 C3:5 c;64 ($62 C>63 C>54
R357
R361
R358
R359
R360
R363
R362
R364
R365
R366
R333
R367
R323
R3 54
R356
R353
R350
R351
.R355
R372
R349
R352
EIZ
R345
R342
R346
R371
R373
R370
R347
R348
696 -6096-00
696 -6097-00
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-40 for revision and new parts.
Manual Revision 1
DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
L 076-0165-09
076-0343- 00
200 -0247-00
47-1736-02
091-0087-00
‘\
ASSEMBLY NO. 200-0249-00 PAGE 1
DESCRIPTION NAV/COMM BOARD SA
(JNIT KX175 0
REVISION 27
IJSED DN ASSEMBLY 069-1016-00
ASSEMBLY DRAW!NG NO. 300-0326-00
NOTE: R indicates revision. ,See page 6-49 for revision and new parts.
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-49 for revision and new parts.
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-49 for revision and new parts,
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-49 for revision and new parts.
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-49 for revision and new parts.
NOTE: R indicates revision. See Page 6-49 for revision and new parts.
VOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-49 for revision and new parts.
Page 6-48 Rev. 4, January, 1976
Parts List Revision Record
,C446
R440
R408
R443
R441
R409
R410
R439
R492
R415
R414
R413
R450
R417
R447
R448
R446
R407
R44 5
R406
R405
R449
R404
R403
R444
R422
R402
R421
R424
R401
R425
R426
R437
R435
R433
R438
R431
R428
R434
R432
R436
R427
R429
R430
009-5075-00 PC BOARD 1
150-0042-10 TUBING SHRINKABLE .2
c 601 113-5471-00 CAP 470PF 10% X5F 1
Rl c 602 113-3068-00 CAP 6.8PF 5% N150 1 ’
C 603 113-5471-00 CAP 470PF 10% X5F 1
C .604 113-3120-00 CAP 12PF 5% N150 1
C 605 113-5151-01 CAP 150PF 10% X5F 1
c 606 106-0034-00 CAP FT 1.5KPF 20% 1
C 607 113-6103-00 CAP .OlUF 20% X5F 1
C 608 106-0034-00 CAP FT 1.5KPF 20% 1
Rl C 609 113-3270-00 CAP 27PF 5% N150 1
C 610 102-0024-09 CAP VARI 7-35PF 1
C 613 113-6103-00 CAP .OlUF 20% X5F 1
C 614 113-6103-00 CAP .OlUF 20% X5F 1
C 615 106-0034-00 CAP FT 1.5KPF 20% 1
C 616 113-3820-00 CAP 82PF 5X X5F 1
C 617 113-3820-00 CAP 82PF 5% X5F 1
c 618 113-3680-00 CAP 68PF 5% X5F 1
C 619 102-0024-09 CAP VARI 7-35PF 1
C 620 113-6103-00 CAP .OlUF 20% X5F 1
C 621 106-0034-00 CAP FT 1.5KPF 20X 1
C 622 102-0024-09 CAP VARI 7-35PF 1
C 628 113-6103-00 CAP .OlIJF 20% X5F 1
C 629 113-3180-00 CAP 18PF 5% N150 1
CR 601 007-6022-00 DIODE TS6 1
CR 602 007-6022-00 DIODE TS6 1
L 601 019-2057-11 CHOKE .82UH 5% 1
Rl 0 601 007-0134-00 TRANSISTOR SE3005 1
R 601 130-0392-25 RES 3.9K 10% QW 1
R 602 130-0472-2 5 RES 4.7K 10% QW 1
R 603 130-0271-25 RES 270 10X QW 1
R 604 130-0470-25 RES 47 10% OW 1
Rl R 605 130-0472-25 RES 4.7K 10% QW 1
R 606 130-0471-25 RES 470 10X QW 1
Rl R 607 130-0039-25 RES 3.9 10% QW 1
R 608 130-0180-35 RES 18 10% HW 1
R 609 130-0511-33 RES 510 5’% HW 1
R 610 130-0511-33 RES 510 5% HW 1
R 611 130-0680-35 RES 68 10% HW 1
R 613 130-0391-25 RES 390 10% QW 1
R 614 130-0750-33 RES 75 5% HW 1
R 615 130-0300-33 RES 30 5% HW 1
R 618 130-0510-23 RES 51 5% OW 1
T 601 019-3044-00 TRANSFORMER RF 1
T 602 019-3026-00 TRANS BIFILAR WND 1
NOTE: R ind ica t es revis ion. See page 6-56 for revision and new parts.
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-56 for revision and new parts.
C602
C603
Q601
R603
R628
c601
R607 C607
C606 R608
C604 CR601
C608 ,C613
T602
R611
c610
C609
R613
T603 'CR602
C619 'R614
C618 ,L601
C616
C617
C622
696-6101-00
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-59 for revision and new parts,
cR604
FL602 L604 R6,i6 ,i
c629 C625
FL601 c627 FL603
CR603 C631
~624 R617
c623 C626
C632
T604
C612 4604 5172
R612
4603
c611
4602 5173
0 USED ON ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
200-0250-00
NO. 300-0323-00
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6 -62 for revision and new parts.
0
Page 6-62 Rev. 6, December, 1977
KI ~G
KX 170A r KX 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
R721
R702
R77h
R705 R727
NOTE:’ R indicates revision. See page6-66. for revision and new parts.
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-66 for revision and new parts.
l
KI G
KX 170A 7 KX 175
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
,q703
q705
.R725
C716
c711 R724
L703
T702 c713 .CR705
,C712 ,L702 .Q706
.T701
.CR704 -4704
-CR703
.R719
-L701
-K701
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-70 for revision and new parts.
NOTE: R indicates revision. See page 6-70 for revision and new parts.
047-1964-00 Cover 1 1
047-1965-00 Plate, Bottom 1 1
. -
,P?ge 6-72 Rev. 4; January, 1976
I _
K-1651' .,
ENGR. APPROVAL
PARTS LIST REVISION HISTORY
YAME ASS’Y. NO.
0 ?EV
Voltage
\SS’Y. DWG.
CHANGE
Converter
300-0198-00
SYMBOL
UNIT
KA 38/KA 39
071-1041-OO/Ol
USED ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0 17
0
0 RlOl
CR103
Cl02
Cl01
CR102
CR101
R104
CR104
RI.03
R102
696-6105-00
NOTE : The KX 175 Parts List also applies to the KX 170A except where differences
are noted on the schematics, Figures 5-50, 5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54.
’ w
KING,
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSCEIVER
INSTALLATION
MANUAL
006-0062-01
TABLEOFCONTENTS
SECTIONI
GENERALINFORMATION
Paragraph Page
SECTION
II
INSTALLATION
2.1 General 2-l
2.2 Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment 2-l
2.3 KY 195 Installation 2-l
2.4 KA 39 Installation 2-2
2.5 Antenna Installation 2-2
2.6 Cabling 2-3
SECTION
Ill
OPERATION
3.1 General 3-l
3.2 KY 195 Comm Controls 3-l
3.3 Post-Installation Checkout 3-2
i
KlNG
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
HISTORYOF REVISIONS
ii
KING
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
SECTION
I
GENERAL
INFORMATION
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains information relative to the physical, mechanical and electrical
characteristics of the King Radio Corporation Silver Crown KY 195.
1.3 DESIGNFEATURES
A. Controls
B. Electronics
Page l-l
KING
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
C. Construction
1.4 POWERREQUIREMENTS
The KY 195 requires 13. 75 volts for proper operation. Aircraft having electrical power
plants producing 27. 5 volts require the installation of a voltage converter. The KA 39
Voltage Converter, designed to convert 27. 5 volts to 13. 75 volts, may be conveniently
remote mounted in the aircraft.
1.5 TECHNICALCHARACTERISTICS
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
KY 195 TRANSCEIVER
TSO COMPLIANCE:
Environmental DAPBAAXXXXXX
Page l-2
KING
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
COMM TRANSCEIVER
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
Page l-3
KING
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
AUDIO
AUXILARY AUDIO INPUTS : Three (3) 500 ohms with 30db isolation
between any two.
KA 39 VOLTAGE CONVERTER
A B
POWER: Input Volts 27. 5vdc 27. 5vdc
output Volts 13.75vdc 13. 75vdc
(nominal) (nominal)
Page l-4
KING
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
1.7 ACCESSORIES
REQUIREDBUT NOT SUPPLIED
A. Communication antenna and cables
1.8 LICENSEREQUIREMENTS
The Federal Communications Commission requires that the operator of the transmitter
in this equipment hold a Restricted Radio Telephone Operator Permit, or higher class
license. A permit may be obtained by an U. S. citizen from the nearest field office of
the FCC; no examination is required.
This equipment has been type accepted by the FCC and entered on their list of type
accepted equipments as King KY 195 and must be identified as King KY 195.
-CAUTlON-
Page l-5
KING
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
SECTION
II
INSTALLATION
2.1 GENERAL
This section contains suggestions and factors to consider before installing the KY 195
COMM unit and KA 39 Voltage Converter (27. 5V installations only). Close adherence
to these suggestions will assure a more satisfactory performance from the equipment.
(a) The KY 195 is mounted rigid in the aircraft panel. Mark and cut the
mounting hole as shown in Figure 2-4. The purpose of the “behind
aircraft panel mount cutout is to allow a margin of error in cutout size
and prevent the mounting tray front edge from being visible. The mount-
ing tray bottom lip should extend through the mounting hole flush with
the instrument panel to insure proper plug pin engagement.
(b) Avoid mounting close to any high external heat source. If this is done,
no blower or ram air cooling will be required.
(c) Remember to allow adequate space for installation of cables and connect-
ors.
(4 Secure the mounting rack to instrument panel per Figure 2-4. The rear
mounting bosses should be attached to the airframe by means of support
brackets.
(4 Slide the KY 195 into the rack and secure by turning locking screwon
the front panel.
Page 2-1
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
-CAUTION -
Do not force locking tab screw.
(f) Each KY 195 installation kit contains a locking bar (KPN 047-1720-00),
bracket (KPN 047-1721-00) and two rivets (KPN 092-5021-00). These
may be installed at customer’s option to provide a means of locking
the radio to the instrument panel with a padlock located on the lower
rear corner of the mounting tray.
(g) The installing agency will supply and fabricate all external cables.
The plugs required are supplied by King Radio.
(d) The installing agency will supply and fabricate external cables.
2.5 ANTENNAINSTALLATION
Page 2-2
!!Y
INI!! 5
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
(b) Refer to Figure 2-2 for the COMM antenna cable connector assembly.
Solder tack the snap on shield to the connector base at two points to
insure that a good electrical ground is made.
2.6 CABLING
(4 The length and routing of the external cables must be carefully studied
and planned prior to installation. Avoid sharp bends and placing cables
too near the aircraft control cables.
(b) Fabricate the external cables in accordance with the installation draw-
ing that fulfills the system requirement.
-NOTE-
(c) Since other radio equipment will possibly utilize the same speaker cir-
cuits for muting, speaker selection and microphone switching must be
devised by the installing agency. The KY 195 does not shunt the speaker
line of other equipment when the off-on-test switch is turned “off”.
696-6002-00 (R-01
Page 2-3
KING
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
696-6003-00
Page 2-4
zis
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
NOTES :
I, ALL DIMENSIONS IN PARENTHESIS ARE IN CENTIMETERS.
TO HEATER DUCTOROTHERSOURCESOFHEAT
155-5076-00 (R- )
FIGURE 2-3 KA 39
VOLTAGE CONVERTER OUTLINE AND MOUNTING DRAWING
Page 2-5
KING
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
l-r
6.100
( 15.50)
7
3 IO0
I7 87)
\ /
6.261
(IS 95)
.
ANTI-THEFT BRACKET
047-1721-00
NOTES.
I. DIMENSIONS
2. WEIGHT:
3
6.0
IN INSTALLATIONS
IN WRENTHESIS
LES
INVOLVING
ARE IN CENTIMETER\
Page 2-7
KING
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
-4----gi-t- j--- Q
SECTION
III
OPERATION
3.1 GENERAL
All controls required to operate the KY 195 are located on the unit front panel.
The ON-OFF-TEST control is located directly above the COMM A channel selector.
Power is supplied to the COMM when this control is either in the ON or TEST position.
The TEST position is used to defeat the COMM automatic squelch for both test purposes
and listening to extremely weak signals.
The Volume (VOL) control, located on the lower left side of the KY 195 is used to adjust
the transceiver audio volume. The KY 195 system power ON/OFF switch is independent
of this control, allowing the COMM volume to remain at a desired preset level.
The twoconcentric knobs under the COMM A frequency window are used to dial COMM
A frequencies. The larger knob selects MHz and the smaller knob selects KHz. The
transceiver is inoperable in the two unused MHz positions between 118MHz and 135MHz.
Clockwise rotation selects higher frequencies. The dial mechanism has no stops, per-
mitting continuous rotation.
The two concentric knobs under the COMM B frequency window are used to dial COMM
B frequent ies. The larger knob selects MHz and the smaller knob selects KHz. The
. transceiver is inoperable in the two unused MHz potitions between 118MHz and 135MHz.
Clockwise rotation selects higher frequencies. The dial mechanism has no stops, per-
mitting continuous rotation.
Page 3-l
COMMUNICATIONS
a5 TRANSCEIVER
1
COMM A FREQUENCY READOUT
\
MHz FREQUENCY SELECTOR
696-6106-00
FIGURE 3- 1 KY 195 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
3.3 POST-INSTALLATION
CHECKOUT
An operational performance flight test is recommended after the installation is corn-
pleted to insure satisfactory performance of the equipment in its normal environment.
Page 3-2
MAINTENANCE/OVERHAUL
MANUAL
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSCEIVER
TABLEOFCONTENTS
Paragraph
SECTION
IV THEORY
OFOPERATION
ANDMAINTENANCE
4. 1 General 4-l
SECTION
V ILLUSTRATED
PARTSLIST
Item Page
1. KY 195 5-l
2. Front Plate Sub-Assembly 5-l
3. Switch Head Sub-Assembly 5-2
4. Switching Matrix Assembly 5-10
5. COMM SMO Board Sub-Assembly 5-14
6. COMM SMO Sub-Assembly 5-14
7. Receiver Board Sub-Assembly 5-14
8. Transmitter Assembly 5-16
9. Rear Plate Assembly 5- 16
10. Audio Drive Board 5-16
11. Rear Divider Sub-Assembly 5-16
12. COMM Cable Sub-Assembly 5-16
LISTOFILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Page
i
KING
KY 195
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
TABLEOFCONTENTS
Figure Page
ii
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
SECTION
IV
THEORY
OFOPERATION
ANDMAINTENANCE
4.1 GENERAL
KY 195 unit incorporates a 360 channel communications transceiver, a 5 watt audio
system, and dual control heads. The transceiver and audio systems are identical to
the respective portions of the KX 175. For theory and maintenance procedures on the
COMM transceiver or audio system, refer to the KX 175 text. Theory and maintenance
of the dual control head mechanism appear in this section.
Wafer switches in the KY 195 are identical to the COMM wafer switches used in the
l-2; 175. Lever switch “A-B” applies either “A” or “B” channeling information to the
SMC) and “A” or “B” tuning voltage to the varactor tuned filters in the COMM receiver
preselector.
4.3 DUALCONTROLHEAD-DETAILED
DESCRIPTION
Refer to Figure 5-55 in the KX 170A/ KX 175 Maintenance Manual for the KY 195 Switch-
ing Assembly Diagram.
The DPST switch (Sill) contacts are open and the “B” tuning voltage (red-blue wire)
from switch wafer S106 is disconnected from the COMM tuning voltage buss. Addition-
ally, the common wire to the “B” switch wafers (red-gray wire) assumes a voltage of
approximately 8 volts, back biasing the isolation diodes associated with the “B” wafer
switches which effectively disconnects the “B” switching circuitry from the COMM SMO.
‘rransistors Q201-Q204 are saturated. Q204 shorts the common wire of the “A” switch
wafers (brown-gray wire) to ground, activating the “A” wafer switch functions. Q203
connects the negative side of the “A” tuning voltage divider on switch wafer, S102, to
ground while Q201 connects the positive side to +8. 5VDC providing a current path
through the tuning voltage divider. The “A” tuning voltage from switch wafer S102 is
connected directly to the COMM tuning voltage buss (red-blue wire) providing “A”
tuning voltage to the COMM receiver preselector.
The DPST switch (Sill) contacts are closed, connecting (a) the COMM tuning voltage
from switch wafer S106 to the tuning voltage buss (red-blue wire) and (b) the common
wire of the “13” switch wafers (red-gray wire) to ground. With the common wire on
ground, the “B” channeling wafers are activated and transistors QZOl-Q204 are off.
With Q203 and Q201 off, no current flows through the “A” tuning voltage divider on switch
wafer S102, isolating it from the COMM tuning voltage buss (red-blue wire). With Q204
off, the “A” wafers and associated isolation diodes represent an open circuit to the
COMM SMO frequency selection circuitry.
4.4 TROUBLESHOOTING
THEDUALCONTROL
HEAD
Refer to Figure 5-55 in the Kx 17OA/KX 175 Maintenance Manual for the KY 195 switching
matrix voltage measurements. See the KX 175 Manual for channeling malfunctions, refer
to Table 4-4 “COMM Programmable Counter Coding” and for COMM receiver preselector
tuning voltage versus channel frequency see Table 5-4 “COMM Channel-Receive SMO
Frequency-Tuning Voltage. ”
1. KY 195 - See Page 6-l and 6-2 in KX 17OAIKX 175 Maintenance Manual.
2. Front Plate Sub-Assembly - See Page 6-3 thru 6-5 in KX 170A/KX 175
Maintenance Manual.
Note: R indicates Revision. See Page 5-4A for Revision and New Parts.
Note: R indicates Revision. See Page 5-4A for Revision and New Parts.
Note: R indicates Revision. See Page 5-4A for Revision and New Parts.
Assembly No: 200-0253-01 (B/M RL, Rev. #8) Manual Revision 4 (C’ont’d)
-0\05-00
(5 134)
047-2115 -09 -,,I
I. [1 NEARSIDE TERM.
2. 3 FARSIDE TERM.
3. SWITCHES READ FROM LEFT SIDE OF UNIT
/PI I6
200-0575-04
(WHT/VIO)
(wHT/GRY) p125-
PI261
\
r PI27 (WHT)
rPl28 (WHTIELU)
PI29 (RED/GRYl RI43
-PI32 (RED/ELU)
PI33 (ORNIGRY)
LPl47 N.C.
i
L iPl4l
031~gvg-00
N. C PI46 NC
NOTE:
WIRES TO BE STRIPPED AND TINNED ,200 FROM END
Note: R indicates Revision. See Page 5- 10 for R,evision and New Parts.
026-0001-00
I50 -0003-10
\..,,
---I.‘...,\
.....
C
\
TO SWITCHING HEeD ASS’Y
300-0429-00114 lp ,8,
ELK
TO COMM. BD ASS’YdP4,6
RED/BL”-
300-0432-00
TO SWITCHING HEAD ASS’YdP I755 oRN’GRY-
300.0429-00114
076-0339-00
089-5878-05
(SCREW FARSIDE)
PI05 BRN/GRY
PI08 BLIJ
-089-2076-30 (5)
__- ---y 089-8003-34 (5)
TO SWITCHING HEAD ASS’Y
300-0429-00114 - 009-0030-02 (5)
-047-2362-02 I
PI03 YEL/WHT
P302
P305
P304
P303
TO COMM. SMO BD. SUB A55Y \
P308 GRYIYEL K3
300 -032600 -
P307 VIOIYEL K2 /
P309
P310
P301 YEL KOO d
: -
TO SWITCHING’HEAD ASS’Y
NOTE
8. Transmitter Assembly
See Pages 6-54 thru 6-57 in
KX 17OA/KX 175 Maintenance Manual
I
FIGURE 5-3 RECEIVER BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY
(Dwg. No. 696-6107-00)
Page .5- 14 Rev. 2, December, 1972 l
KING
KA 47
DME CODE CONVERTER
The purpose of the King KA 47 is to convert the King KN 65 shift code obtained from the
King KX 170A/175 to the standard ARINC 2 out of 5 DME code used in the King
KDM 700A. It is designed to be mounted next to the remote mounted DME equipment,
0 and pin A from 5301 should be grounded at the same point as the DME ground. The
power requirement is either 13. 75VDC or 27. 5VDC at 225 ma.
3:
1r
I-
O -*
SF-
0,
155-5082-00(17-O)
P/O
‘0
-
9
1102
12
13
9
IO
3
OME MHz M I 4
C
5
4
5
II04
D 11-4
II-t-
IlG4
4,
0
MHz E
DME MHz M 3
E
GROUND
A I
CRIII CRIIO T
T
DME SWITCHING COMMON #I OME SWITCHING COMMON #I
N
DME SWITCHING COMMON #2 LIME SWITCHING COMMON Z2
P
-
OOZ-0193-OOIR-1)1/2
RZOI
IK
+SVDC
R202 CR201 a201
P/b J361 4.7K u
DME KHz K 0
I ti ii
P203 I
7: CR203
t* -g
KHz D
DME KHZ K 2 1206
9 P206
I
0 c
IV.07
IK
KHz E
R213
Cl204 1206 IK
II
0209
I
DME KHz K 3
009-5179-00 PC BOARD 1
c 101 096-1030-2s CAP TANT 150pf 1OV 1
CR10 1 007 -60 16-00 DIODE SIL lN4 154 1
CR102 007-6016-00 DIODE SIL lN4154 1
CR103 007 -60 16-00 DIODE SIL lN4154 1
CR104 007-6016-00 DIODE SIL lN4154 1
CR105 007 -6023-00 DIODE GER lN277 1
CR106 007 -6023 -00 DIODE GER lN277 1
CR.107 007-6023-00 DIODE GER lN277 1
CR108 007 -6023 -00 DIODE GER lN277 1
CR109 007-6023-00 DIODE GER lN277 1
CR110 007 -6023 -00 DIODE GER lN277 1
CR111 007 -6023-00 DIODE GER lN277 1
R2 CR112 007-5011-13 DIODE ZENER 5.6V 1
I 101 120 -000 1-o 1 INT CKT SN5400 1
I 102 120-0001-01 INT CKT SN5400 1
I 103 120-0033-01 INT CKT SN5404 1
I 104 120-0001-01 INT CKT SN5400 1
I 105 120 -0003 -0 1 INT CKT SN5410 1
I 106 120-0003-01 INT CKT SN5410 1
&lo1 007 -0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
Q102 007 -0026 -03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
&lo3 007 -0026 -03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
Q104 007 -0026 -03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
Q105 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
QlO6 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
Q107 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
Q108 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
Q109 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
QllO 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
RlOl 130-O 102-23 RES F/C 1K 5% QW 1
R102 130-0472-23 RES F/C 4.7K 5% QW 1
R103 130-O 102-23 RES F/C 1K 5% QW 1
R 104 130-0472-23 RES F/C 4.7K 5% QW 1
R105 130-O 102-23 RES F/C 1K 5% QW 1
R106 130-0472-23 RES F/C 4.7K 5% QW 1
R107 130-O 102-23 RES F/C 1K 5% QW 1
R108 130-0472-23 RES F/C. 4.7K 5% QW 1
R109 130 -0 102-23 RES F/C 1K 50J QW 1
RllO 130-O 102-23 RES F/C 1K 5% QW 1
Rlll 130-O 102-23 RES F/C 1K 5% QW 1
Note: R indicates Revision. See Page 13 for Revision and New Parts.
Note: R indicates Revision. See Page 13 for New Revision and New Parts.
009-5180-00 PC BOARD 1
CR201 007-6016-00 DIODE SIL lN4 154 1
CR202 007-6016-00 DIODE SIL lN4154 1
CR203 007-6016-00 DIODE SIL lN4154 1
CR204 007-60 16-00 DIODE SIL lN4154 1
CR205 007-6023-00 DIODE GER lN277 1
CR206 007-6023-00 DIODE GER lN277 1
CR207 007-6023-00 DIODE GER lN277 1
CR208 007,-6023-00 DIODE GER lN277 1
CR209 007-6023-00 DIODE GER lN277 1
I20 1 120-0003-O 1 INT CKT SN5410 1
1202 120-0003-01 INT CKT SN5410 1
1203 120-0033-01 INT CKT SN5404 1
1204 120-0001-01 INT CKT SN5400 1
1205 120-0001-01 INT CKT SN5400 1
1206 120 -000 1-o 1 INT CKT SN5400 1
Q20 1 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
Q202 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
Q203 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
Q204 007-OOZS-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
Q205 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 .1
Q206 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
Q207 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
Q208 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
Q209 007-0026-03 TSTR SIL 2N3416 1
R201 130-0102-23 RES F/C 1K 5% QW 1
R.202 130-0472-23 RES F/C 4.i’K 5% QW 1
R203 130-0102-23 RES F/C 1K 5% QW 1
R204 130-0472-23 RES F/C 4.7K 5% QW 1
R.20 5 130-0102-23 RES F/C 1K 5% QW 1
R206 130-0472-23 R.ES F/C 4.7K 5% QW 1
R207 130-0102-23 RES F/C 1K 5% QW 1
R208 130-0472-23 RES F/C 4.7K 5% QW 1
R209 130-0102-23 RES F/C 1K 5% QW 1
R210 130-0102-23 RES F/C 1K 5% QW 1
R211 130-0102-23 RES F/C 1K 5% QW 1
R.2 12 130-0102-23 RES F/C 1K To”/ QW 1
ti2:!3 130-0102-23 RES F/C 1K 570 QW 1
Note: R indicates Revision. See Page 15 for Revision and New Parts.
NOTE: Rl indicates revision. See Page 18 for Rev. and New Parts
OTE: R indicates revision. See Page 18 for Rev. and New Parts.
&
c. 200-0349-00
089-8110-34 B
(2)
132.0103.,2
I R302)
089-6008-07 I41
(4)
089-2009-37 (41
030-2000-00
(J3011
r KA 47
WIRING I 7.3 HEDULE 1
BUSS WIRE 025-0003-00
IWfT NO. FROM TO l- COLOR LENGTH
E
c)25-ODl6-33 P3D3 PI16 ORN
-16 1301 - PIN 6 P 103 BRN/BLU : l/4
-26 -PIN C PlDl RED/BLU 6 l/4
PI16 -34 - PIN D PI02 ORNlELU 6 I14
PI01 46 - PIN E PI04 YELIBLU 6 I,4
PI02
PI03 -19 - PIN F P201 BRN,WHT 5 112
PI04 -29 P2D3 REDIWHT 5 I12
PI05 -39 1 -pPI::!l P2iM ORNlWHT 5 l/2
PI06 49 - PIN K P202 YE LIWHT 5 112
PI07 -40 - PIN P ,302 PIN P YEL/BLK 3
-44 1301 - PIN N 1302 PIN N YEL 3
Pi09 1301 PIN A CMSSIS GND ELK 3 I,2
PIlO
-57 ,302 ! - PIN A Pi12 GRN/VlO 5 112
PI,, -17
PI12 - PIN 6 PI07 BRN/VlO 5 l/2
PI13 -27 -PING PI09 RED/VI0 5 I/2
PI14 -37 PIN D PI,0 ORN,VlD 5 l/2
-47 - PIN E PIII YELlVlO 5 I12
PI15
PIN F P213 GRNlGRY 6 Ii4
- PIN H P212 REDlGRY 6 II4
-PINJ P211 DRN/GRY 6 I14
009-5179-oo- - PIN K P210 YELlGAY 6 1/4
-PINL P2Q9 GRN,GRY 6 l/4
-PIN N PI 14 YEL 5 I12
302 - PIN P PI I3 YEL/GLK 5 l/2
TRANSISTOR MOUNTING
(BOTTOM VIEW)
NOTES:
-b‘* w
KING,
KX 170WKX175B
NAVIGATIONRECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSCEIVER
INSTALLATION
MANUAL
006-0085-O
1
0 TABLEOFCONTENTS
SECTION
I GENERAL
INFORMATION
Paragraph Page
1. 1 Introduction l-l
1.2 Purpose of Equipment l-l
1.3 Design Features l-l
1.4 Power Requirements l-2
1. 5 Technical Characteristics 1-2
1. 6 Units and Accessories Supplied l-9
1.7 Accessories Required, but not Supplied 1-9
1.8 License Requirements l-10
.
SECTION
II INSTALLATION
2. 1 General 2-l
2.2 Unpacking and Inspection Equipment 2-l
2.3 KX 17OB/KX 175B Installation 2-1
2.4 KA 39 Installation 2-2
2.5 Antenna Installation 2-2
2.6 Cabling 2-3
SECTION
III OPERATION
3.1 General 3-1
3.2 KX 170B/KX 175B NAV/COMM Controls 3-l
3.3 Post-Installation Checkout 3-2
SECTION
IV KA47
4.1 General 4-l
KlNG
KX,170B/KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
HISTORYOF REVISIONS
l SECTION
I
GENERAL
INFORMATION
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains information relative to the physical, mechanical and electrical characteristics
of the King Radio Corporation Silver Crown KX 170B/KX 175B, and interconnect information for
various NAV/COMM system options.
1.2 PURPOSE
OF EQUIPMENT
The King KX 170B / KX 175B NAV/COMM combines in a single panel mounted unit a 720 channel
VHF COMM Transceiver and an independent 200 channel VHF NAV receiver. The NAV Receiver
supplies VOR/LOC information to navigational converters and provides frequency selection for
remote mounted Distance Measuring Equipment and Glideslope Receivers.
1.3 DESIGNFEATURES
A. Controls
1. On-Off switches are independent of volume control settings allowing the volume
to remain at desired levels.
2. Separate NAV and COMM ON-OFF switches (KX 175B NAV and COMM are
electrically independent).
B. Electronics
1. Varactor diode tuned filters eliminate use of mechanical tuning shafts and
mechanisms.
4. The digital frequency synthesizers utilize state of the art integrated circuits
to replace all but 6 crystals (KX 170B) and 7 crystals (KX 175B), providing
improved mean time between failure.
Page l-l
KlNG
KX 17OB/KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
7. Tight AGC (typically 0. 5db from 10~~ to 20,000~~) minimizes audio level
variations.
C. Construction
1.4 POWERREQUIREMENTS
The KX 170B/KX 175B requires 13.75 volts for proper operation. Aircraft having electrical
power plants producing 27. 5 volts require the installation of a voltage converter. The KA 39
Voltage Converter, designed to separately convert NAV and COMM 27. 5 volts to 13. 75 \,olts, may
be conveniently remote mounted in the aircraft.
1.5 TECHNICAL
CHARACTERISTICS
KX 170B TRANSCEIVER
PECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
GENERAL
Page l-2
KlNG
KX 170B/KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
KX 170B TRANSCEIVER
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
COMM TRANSCEIVER
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
AGC C HARAC TERISTICS : From 10~~ to 20, 000~~ audio output will not
vary more than 3db.
NAV RECEIVER
SENSITIVITY:
Navigation 1. 51.r~ (soft) will provide a half-flag indication
1. Opv (soft) will provide a 6db signal + noise
noise
ratio.
Page l-3
KlNG
KX 170B/KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
KX 170B TRANSCEIVER
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
DME CHANNELING:
I
MO Ml M2 M3 Kg Kl K2 K3
108 - - 0 - . ox 0 0 - - . x0
109 - - - 0 .1x 0 0 0 - . .x5 0
110 0 - - - .2x 0 0 0 0
111 0 0 - - .3x - 0 0 0
112 0 0 0 - .4x - - 0 0
113 - 0 0 0 .5x 0 - - 0
114 0 - 0 0 .6X - 0 - -
115 - 0 - 0 .7x - - 0 -
116 0 - 0 - .8X - - - 0
117 0 0 - 0 .9x 0 - - -
Page l-4
KlNG
KX l’IOB/I(X 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
NOTE : (0) = ILS common, (-) = open, (1) = either KN 73 A+ (KN 73 Installations)
or KX l’i’OB/KX 175B A+ with lK0 source resistance (KI 2 11C /KI 2 12/KI 213 /
KI 2 14 installations).
I
AUDIO
4UXILIARY AUDIO INPUTS: Two (2) 500 ohms with 30db isolation between
any two.
KX 175B TRANSCEIVER
IS0 COMPLIANCE:
Environmental DAPBAAXXXXXX
Page l-5
KlNG
KX 170B/KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
KX 175B TRANSCEIVER
PECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
TRANSMITTER
NAV RECEIVER
Page l-6
KlNG
KX 170B/KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
KX 175B TRANSCEIVER
lPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC 1
iENSITIVITY :
LGC CHARACTERISTICS From 10~~ to 20, 000~~ audio output will not
vary more than 3db
)ME CHANNELING:
MO Ml M2 M3 Kg Kl K2 K3 50kHz
108 - - 0 - . ox 0 0 - - . x0 1
109 - - - 0 . 1x 0 0 0 - . x5 0
110 0 - - - .2x 0 0 0 0
111 0 0 - - . 3x 0 0 0
112 0 0 0 - .4x - - 0 0
113 - 0 0 0 .5x 0 - - 0
114 0 - 0 0 .6X 0 - -
115 - 0 - 0 .7x - - 0 -
116 0 - 0 - .8X - - - 0
117 0 0 - 0 .9x 0 - - -
Page l-7
KlNG
KX 170B/KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
KX 175B TRANSCEIVER
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
SLIDESLOPE CHANNELING:
GS GS GS GS GS GS GS GS GS GS
108 109 110 111 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.7 0.9 5OkHz
108 0 - - - ox - - - - - . x0 -
109 - 0 - - . 1x 1 - - - - . x5 0
110 - - 0 - . 2x - - - - -
111 - - - 0 . 3x -l---
112 - - - - . 4X - - - - -
113 - - - - . 5x - - 1- -
114 - - - - (5X - - _ _ -
115 - - - - .7x - - - 1 -
116 - - - - .8X -___-
117 - - - - .9x ----1
NOTE: (0) = ILS common, (-) = open, (1) = either KN 73 A+ (KN 73 Installations) or
KX 170B. KX 175B A+ with 1KR source resistance (KI 211C /KI 212/KI 2 13 /
KX 2 14 installations).
AUDIO
AUXILIARY AIJDIO INPUTS: Two (2) 500 ohms with 30db isolation between
any two.
KA 39 VOLTAGE CONVERTER
Page l-8
KX 170B/KX
KlNG
175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
1.7 ACCESSORIES
REQUIRED,
BUTNOTSUPPLIEDr
A. Communication and navigation antenna and cables.
1.8 LICENSEREQUIREMENTS
The Federal Communications Commission requires that the operator of the transmitter of this
equipment holds a Restricted Radio Telephone Operator Permit, or higher class license. A
permit may be obtained by a U. S. citizen from the nearest field office of the FCC; no examination
is required.
This equipment has been type accepted by the FCC and entered on their list of type accepted
equipments as King KX 170B/KX 175B and must be identified as King KX 170B or King KX 175B.
-CAUTION -
Page l-10
KX 170B/KX
KlNG
175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
SECTION
II
INSTALLATION
2.1 GENERAL
This section contains suggestions and factors to consider before installing the KX 170B/KX 175B
NAV/COMM unit and KA 39 Voltage Converter (27. 5V installations only). Close adherence to
these suggestions will assure a more satisfactory performance from the equipment.
;Zf”OAPACKINGAND INSPECTING
EQUIPMENT
Exercise extreme care when unpacking each unit. Make a visual inspection of each unit for evi-
dence of damage incurred during shipment. If a claim for damage is to be made, save the shipping
container to substantiate the claim. When all equipment is removed, place in the shipping contain-
er all packing materials for use in unit storage or reshipment. The KX 170B/KX 175B installation
will conform to standards designated by the customer, installing agency and existing conditions as
to unit location and type of installation.
(4 The KX 170B/KX 175B is mounted rigid in the aircraft panel. Mark and cut the mounting
hole as shown in Figure 2-5. The purpose of the “behind aircraft panel mount cutout is
to allow a margin of error in cutout size and prevent the mounting tray front edge from
being visible. The mounting tray bottom lip should extend through the mounting hole
flush with the instrument panel to insure proper plug pin engagement.
(b) Avoid mounting close to any high external heat source. Forced air cooling should be
supplied for 3 or more radios in a stack.
(cl Remember to allow adequate space for installation of cables and connectors.
(4 Secure the mounting rack to instrument panel per Figure 2-5. The rear mounting bosses
should be attached to the airframe by means of support brackets.
(e) Slide the KX 170B /KX 175B into the rack and secure by turning the locking screw on the
front panel.
-CAUTION -
An antitheft mechanism is available for the KX 170B/KX 175B (KPN 050-1326-00 short
locking bar, 050 -1326-O 1, long locking bar). This kit may be installed at the customer’s
option to provide a means of locking the radio to the instrument panel with a padlock
located on the lower rear corner of the mounting tray.
Installation consists of riveting the bracket to the mounting tray as shown in Figure 2-5.
After the radio installation is complete, the locking bar may be inserted and a small
padlock affixed to deter theft.
(d The installing agency will supply and fabricate all external cables. The plugs required
are supplied by King Radio.
(a) Select the KA 39 location considering good thermal conductivity to the airframe, con-
venient cable rounting.and separation from other heat sources, The KA 39 shsuld be
mounted no closer to the KX 170B/KX 175B than is necessary to good ther ma1 isolation.
Cd) The installing agency will supply and fabricate external cables.
2.5 ANTENNAINSTALLATION
(4 Conventional 50 ohm horizontally polarized NAV and vertically polarized COMM antennas
are required with the KX 170B/KX 175B. Vertical bent whip antennas are not recommend-
ed. Wideband COMM antennas provide efficient operation over the COMM band. Antennas
should be installed per manufacturers recommendations. Additional recommendations
are as follows:
COMM ANTENNA
1. Mount antenna on flat metal surface or install a ground plane at least 18 inches
square.
2. The antenna should be well removed from any projections and the engine(s) and
propeller.
3. NAV and COMM Antennas must be well separated to minimize COMM interfer-
ence to NAV while transmitting, (Minimum recommended separation is 30db).
NAV ANTENNA
1. The location should be well removed from other antenna, projections and
engine(s). It should have a clear line of sight area if possible.
2. The antenna MUST BE mounted symmetrically with the centerline of the air-
craft.
3. Avoid running other coaxial cables and wires with the NAV antenna cable.
(b) The antenna connectors on the KX 170B/KX 175B unit are identified on the rear die
casting.
-NOTE-
-CAUTION-
(c) Refer to Figure 2-3 for a dual omni antenna installation if two navigation receivers are
used. VOR antenna duplexers normally cause a 6db signal loss.
(d Refer to Figure 2-2 for the COMM and NAV antenna cable connector assembly. Solder
tack the snap on shield to the connector base at two points to insure that a good electrical
ground is made.
2.6 CABLING
(a) The length and routing of the external cables must be carefully studied and planned prior
to installation. Avoid sharp bends and placing cables too near the aircraft control cables.
(b) Fabricate the external cables in accordance with the installation drawing that fulfills the
system requirement.
-NOTE-
(c) Since other radio and navigation equipment will possibly utilize the same speaker circuits
for muting, speaker selection and microphone switching must be devised by the installing
agency. The KX 170B/KX 175B does not shunt the speaker line of other equipment when
the off-on-test switch is turned “off”.
Plil I CONNECTOR
“IEHED
<PN030-2101-04 FROM
CAKEEND.
/SOLDER
Push braid forward and flatten against connector
cap and solder.
Solder tat connector cap to connector in at least
two places to insure good electrical contact.
NOTES:
I. ALL DIMENSIONS IN PARENTHESIS ARE IN CENTIMETERS.
2.WEIGHT: I.1 Ibs
3 TERMINALS WILL TAKE 16TOZZAWG WIRE
4 TERMINALS ARE tf5-40x14 BD. HD. SCREWS
WARNING
-
OONOT MOUNT IN CLOSE PROXIMITY
TO HEATER DUCT OR OTHER SOURCES OF HEAT
I!@-
3
7 3.100
(787)
L /
L
4 -.ZlB f.55) DIA. I PLC.
(LOCKING PIN HOLE)
CUTOUT DIMENSIONS FOR
FRONT AIRCRAFT PANEL MOUNT
I - 1.650
(4.191
LONG LOCKING BAR
-(BAR MAYBE CUT TO DESIRED LENGTH)
047-1720-01
SHORT LOCKING BAR
- 047-1720-00
ANTI-THEFT BRACKET
ITE 2 2.500
NOTE 4 NOTES:
I, MAKE ONE OF EACH PART SHOWN
2. POP RIVET TOGETHER 6 PLCS.
3. POP RIVET RAM AIR TUBE TO DIFFUSER
HOUSING.
4. DUCK TAPE ALL SEAMS OF DIFFUSER.
AND SEAL IN TUBE.
5. THE LENGTH OF DIFFUSER. AND NUMBER
OF HOLES. DEPENDS ON THE HElGHT OF
RADIO STACK OR AIRCRAFT PANEL.
OUCK-
TAPE
---I7
A m
I Y
.1
3.000
2.5DO
‘NOTES 3 64
FINAL ASSY.
4 PLCS -
3’ooo
------
A
-- --
‘.O;,,,
- ---- - --
t
L ,500
F9iRT B
I-- 3.000 --&- 5.000
, PANEL
AIRCRAFT
SKIN -
OVER MANIFOL
IS POSITIONEN
DE SHOWN, TH
NTED 160° THA
VIEW
r -1 r ---- I
YPW
v)moa
I
I rtt
I .
----
r yzulocuo1
--- --- 1
r XX
--pclDm
1
I
r X2"mole7 r-----
~a- \ mmoa v)u3-a
I I I
- -- - -
r yuN---o 1
I
--
I YZ (00 1
I. I
rI
”
r; --
E8r- YU NO--o 1
c g 1. I
XX -boa\Yx-born
EL
---
--4 r x- N--M 1
“1 I I
I YX --Ice
CCIE
N I
a 5”
I- --------------Y I
FIGURE 2-10 NOT TSO’S DUAL SILVER CROWN SYSTEM INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
(DWG. NO. 155-1128-00 R-5)
Rev. 1, January 1976 Page 2-17
r
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I \I1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I II I I I II I
SECTION
III
OPERATION
3.1 GENERAL
All controls required to operate the KX 170B/KX 175B are located on the unit front panel.
The ON-OFF-TEST control is located directly above the COMM channel selector. Power is
supplied to the COMM when this control is either in the ON or TEST position. The TEST position
is used to defeat the COMM automatic squelch for both test purposes and listening to extremely
weak signals.
The Volume (VOL) control, located on the lower left side of the KX 170B/KX 175B is used to
adjust the transceiver audio volume. The KX 170B/KX 175B system power ON/OFF switch is
independent of this control, allowing the COMM volume to remain at a desired preset level.
The two concentric knobs under the COMM frequency window are used to dial COMM frequencies.
The larger knob selects MHz and the smaller knob selects kHz. The transceiver is inoperable
in the two unused MHz positions between 118MHz and 135MHz. Clockwise rotation selects higher
frequencies. The dial mechanism has no stops, permitting continuous rotation.
The OFF-VOICE-IDENT control is located directly above the NAV channel selector. Power is
supplied to the NAV when this control is either in VOICE or IDENT position. NAV operation is
independent of COMM. With the switch on IDENT, the ground station voice and identification
tone are coupled to the aircraft speaker and/or headphone circuitry. With the switch on VOICE
the identification tone is eliminated, permitting the pilot to monitor the VOR ground station for
voice transmissions without receiving the VOR ident tone.
The navigation receiver volume (VOL) control, on the right side of the KX 17OB/KX 175B is used
to control the level of the audio and/or identification tone output from the navigation receiver.
This control is also independent of the system power switch allowing the NAV volume to remain
at a desired preset level.
The two concentric knobs under the NAV frequency window are used to dial NAV frequencies.
The larger knob selects MHz and the smaller knob kHz. Clockwise rotation selects higher fre-
quencies. Remote DME, Glideslope, and ILS channeling are also performed by this control.
Page 3-l
KlNG175B
KX 170B/KX
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
\ \
KHz FREQUENCY
3.3 POST-INSTALLATION
CHECKOUT
An operational performance flight test is recommended after the installation is completed to in-
sure satisfactory performance of the equipment in its normal environment.
To check the communications transceiver, maintain an appropriate altitude and contact a ground
station facility at a range of at least fifty nautical miles. Contact a ground station close in.
Place the squelch knob in the test position and listen for any unusual electrical noise which would
reduce the COMM receiver sensitivity by increasing the squelch threshold. If possible, verify
the communications capability on both the HIGH and LOW ends of the VHF COMM band.
To check the VOR/ILS System select a VOR frequency within a forty nautical mile range. Listen
to the VOR audio and insure that no electrical interference such as magneto noise is present.
Check the tone identifier filter operation. Fly inbound or outbound on a selected VOR radial and
check for proper LEFT-RIGHT and TO-FROM indications. Check the VOR accuracy.
-NOTE-
Flight test the ILS operation by flying a simulated ILS approach. Check localizer LEFT-RIGHT
deflection and, if applicable, glideslope deflection. Check the localizer accuracy in relation to
the ILS runway. Check the glideslope accuracy in relation to the published ILS approach altitude.
Page 3-2
KlNG
KA 47
l - SECTION
KA47
IV
4.1 GENERAL
The purpose of the King KA 47 is to convert the King KN 65 shift code obtained from the King
KX 170A/175/KX 170B/KX 175B to the standard ARINC 2 out of 5 DME code used in the King
KDM 700A. It is designed to be mounted next to the remote mounted DME equipment, and pin A
from 5301 should be grounded at the same point as the DME ground. The power requirement is
either 13. 75VDC or 27. 5VDC at 225 ma.
Standard digital troubleshooting techniques may be used in troubleshooting the King KA 47.
Page 4-l
KlNG
KA 47
DME CODE CONVERTER
49OOMAx ,
(12 625)
4 200 C.G.
I (IO 666)
-- -
4 620 MAX. -f
(11.734)
2.465 REF.
- (6.261)
NOTE:
.16OiM)5 w--j I. DIMENSIONS IN PARENTHESES ARE IN CENTIMETERS
2 WEIGHT: 0.6 LBS.
r- ------
I xnl-8
u)pco
KX 17OB/KX
1758
NAV/COMM
TRANSCEIVER
TABLEOFCONTENTS
Paragraph Page
SECTION
IV THEORY
OFOPERATION
4. 1 General 4-l
SECTION
V MAINTENANCE
General Maintenance 5-l
Visual Inspection 5-l
Cleaning 5-l
Semiconductor Replacement 5-l
Semiconductor Replacement Maintenance 5-l
Semiconductor Replacement Voltage & Resistance Measurement 5-2
Digital Logic Functions 5-5
a
5.4. 10 VCO Buffer 5-37
5.4.11 High Reference Oscillator 5-37
5.4.12 Implicit Divide By 2 Circuit 5-37
KlNG
KX 170B/KX 175B
NAVIGATION,RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
TABLEOFCONTENTS
Paragraph Page
SECTIONV MAINTENANCE
5.4. 13 2nd Mixer 5-37
5.4. 14 Mixer Low Pass Filter 5-37
5.4. 15 Squaring Amplifier 5-37
SECTION
VI ILLUSTRATED
PARTSLIST 6-l
Final Assembly
:: Front Plate Sub-Assembly 6-4
3. Front Plate Sub-Assembly 6-9A
4. Switching Head Sub-Assembly 6-10
5. Switch Wafer Assemblies 6-14A
6. NAV SMO Board Sub-Assembly 6-23
7. NAV SMO Sub-Assembly 6-29
.8,. COMM SMO Board Sub-Assembly 6-32
9. COMM SMO Sub-Assembly 6-39
10. NAV/COMM Board Sub-Assembly 6-42
11. Transmitter Board Sub-Assembly 6-51
12. Rear Plate Sub-Assembly 6-54
ii
KlNG
I(x 170B/KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
TABLEOFCONTENTS
Paragraph Page
SECTION
VI ILLUSTRATED
PARTSLIST
13. Audio Drive Board Sub-Assembly 6-57
14. Rear Divider Sub-Assembly 6-60
15. Connector and Cable Sub-Assembly 6-65
LISTOF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
KX I.70B/KX 175B
111
KX 170B/KX 175B
NAVLGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
TABLEOFCONTENTS
Figure Page
LISTOF ILLUSTRATIONS
6-l Final Assembly (KX 170B/KX 1758) 6-3
6-1A Final Assembly (KX 170B/KX 175B) 6-3A
6-2 Final Assembly (KY 195B 6-38
6-2A Final Assembly (KY 195B 6-3C
6-3A Front Plate Assemb ly (KX 170B/KX 175B/KY 1958) 6-9
6-3b Front Plate Assemb ly (KX 17OB/KX 175B/KY 1958) 6-90
6-3C Front Plate Assemb ly (KX 170B/KX 175B/KI 195B) 6-9E
6-4 Switching Head Sub-Assembly (KX 170B/KX 175B) 6-15
6 -4A Switching Head Sub-Assembly (KX 170B/KX 175B) 6-17
6-5 Switching Head Sub-Assembly (KY 195B) 6-19
6-5A Switching Head Sub-Assembly (KY 195B) 6-21
6-6 NAV SMO Sub-Assembly 6-31
6-7 COMM SMO Sub-Assembly 6-41
6-8 Rear Plate Sub-Assembly 6-56A
6-9 Rear Divider Sub-Assembly 6-63
TABLES
No.
iv
KlNG
KX l’IOB/KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COL!IMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
a The information
production,
in thts maintenance
or variations
manual does not profess to include all the details of design,
of the equipment, or to cover all the possible contingencies which may
arise during operation, installation, or maintenance. Should special problems arise or further
information be desired, please contact the KING Customer Service Department.
KX 170B/KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATION TRANSCEIVER
SECTION
IV
THEORY
OFOPERATION
4. 1 General
The KX 170B/KX 175B unit incorporates a 200 channel navigation receiver, a 720 channel com-
munications transceiver and a 5 watt audio system.
For discussion purposes, the KX 170B/KX 175B system is split into subsystems and treated on
the basis of block diagram theory and detailed circuit theory. Subsystems are defined as Fre-
quency Synthesizers (COMM and NAV), COMM Transceiver and NAV Receiver.
The KX 1’70B/KX 175B uses a stabilized master oscillator (SMO) for frequency generation. A
feedback loop is used to slave a voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) to the selected multiple fre-
quency of a crystal controlled reference oscillator. The simplified block diagram of Figure 4-l
illustrates the principle of operation of the COMM SMO and NAV SMO.
The VCO output frequency is divided by two, mixed with the High Frequency Crystal Oscillator,
divided by N, and compared in frequency and phase with the Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator.
The filtered error signal biases the VCO. The error signal is a high voltage when the VCO
frequency is low and a low voltage when the VCO frequency is above the desired frequency.
According to the VCO transfer function (Figure 4-2b) this error signal drives the VCO toward the
selected frequency. When the VCO gets near the desired frequency, the loop captures the VCO
and pulls it into phase lock (fVC0 =f selected). In this condition the loop establishes an error
signal that is a 25KHz square wave. The low pass filter recovers the dc component and biases
the VCO to maintain the selected output frequency. The square wave duty factor, and thus the
filtered D-C VCO bias voltage, varies according to the selected VCO frequency. Transfer func-
tions of the various blocks are illustrated in Figure 4-2.
The NAV SMO is a 200 channel frequency synthesizer covering the band from 92.8125-102.7625MHz
in 50KHz steps. The block diagram is the red shaded portion of Figure 5-24. The basic
frequencies appearing in the NAV SMO are tabulated in Table 4-2 and also appear on the block
diagram.
The VCO converts a dc bias voltage to a VHF frequency. The buffer amplifiers isolate the VCO
from reverse conducted electrical interference signals and provide 1Omw output levels for mixer
injection. The Implicit Divide by Two circuit halves the VCO frequency. A mixer is used to
heterodyne the halved VCO frequency and the High Frequency Reference Oscillator. The Mixer
Low Pass Filter passes the difference frequency and filters any spurious mixer products. In the
Squaring Amplifier the analog difference frequency is amplified and clipped to provide a 4. 5V
square wave. The Programmable Divider generates one output pulse for every N input pulses.
Selection of the divide ratio, N, is determined by the wafer switch coding. The 4OOKFz Reference
Oscillator is divided by 16 in the Phase and Frequency Comparator block to obtain a 25KFz refer-
ence. This block also compares the Programmable Counter output in frequency and phase with
the 25KHz reference frequency and generates an appropriate feedback signal to slew the loop until
fLF L
O0
+
FILTERED OUTPUT FREQ.
PHASE ERROR ERROR VOLTAGE
LOW ,fo= 2(fHF-NfLF;
AND SIGNAL ) SIGNEL
PASS CONTROLLE
FREQ.
1 FILTER 1 osc. t
A 4 b1
fHF
1
HIGH
FREO
CRYSTAL
osc.
696-6008 -00
IO’KHZ 25’twz
FREQUENCY
fDESIRED FREQ.
The COMM SMO is a 720 channel, frequency synthesizer covering the band of frequencies from
118.000 to 135. 975MHz in 25KHz steps. The block diagram is the red shaded portion of figure
5-25. The basic frequencies appearing in the COMM SMO are tabulated in Table 4-2 and also
appear on the block diagram.
Basic theory of the NAV SMO (Section 4.2. 1. 2) applies to the COMM SMO. In order to obtain
720 channels and transmit-receive sidestep transitions, the COMM band is split into two 9MHz
Bands (118.000 - 126.975MHz and 127.000 - 135.975MHz). Requirements for T/R switching are
summarized in Table 4-l.
NAV
--7
I
I
Implicit + 2 Freq. 46.40625 - 51.38 125MHz 63. 500 - 67.9875MHz 59.000 - 63.4875MH;
(25KHz steps NAV)
(12. 5KHz steps
COM)
Approx. VCO Bias 2.95 - 7.20 Volts 2. 50 - 7.00 Volts 2.50 - 7.00 Volts
Approx. Receiver
tuning Voltage. 2.95 - 7.20 Volts 2.95 - 7.80
The phase locked loop synthesizes 360 channels in each 9MHz band and is switched between high
and low bands with the High Reference Oscillator crystals and the VCO band switch. This system
provides 720 channels with a 180 digit counter and fast T-R transitions without requiring special
coding of the Programmable Divider. Note that the receiver uses a combination of high and low
side injection and that the first I-F frequency is restricted to 9. OMHz.
The Out of Lock Disable block turns off the receiver buffer and transmitter buffer when the SMO
is out of lock. The VCO is disabled in the two unused MHz positions of the frequency selector.
T206, T207, CR207 thru CR210 (T304, T306, CR309 thru CR310) and associated components form
the balanced mixer. The balanced mixer configuration was chosen to minimize spurious genera-
tion and to provide isolation between the digital circuitry, the VCO, and the high reference oscilla-
tor.
C239, C240, and L204 (C375, C376, and L305) form the mixer low pass filter, which is used to
remove high frequency mixer products.
Q206 and Q209 (Q312, and Q313) are used in a complementary configuration to provide wide band
amplification and clipping. The output waveform is a 4 volt square wave.
Q210, Q211, Y202 (Q315, 316, Y303 - KX 175B Only) and associated components form the low
frequency reference oscillator. The 400KHz reference signal is applied to both the NAV and
COMM phase and frequency discriminator circuits.
The KX 170B/KX 1758 N-4V ProgrammableDivider is identical to the KX 170A/KX 175 NAV
Programmable Divider. Refer to the KX 175 Maintenance Manual Section IV for NAV Program-
mable Divider Circuit Theory, and Figure 5-27 of this section for the NAV SMO schematic and
component placement.
The programmable divider consists of an input inhibit circuit (25KHz Section, 1309 and 1303C)
and three synchronous, cascaded counter blocks; divide by 2 (50KHz Section, 1301), divide by 10
(1OOKHz Section, 1303D, 1304B, and 1306), and divide by 15 (MHz Section, 1302, 1303A, and
1304A). The divide by 2, 10 and 15 provides 300 counter states (2x10~15). The input inhibit
provides one additional state by inhibiting the input for one pulse. Since one input pulse is used to
strobe preset information into the registers, the counter has a total of 302 available states
(2x10~15) +l+l. Each input pulse steps the counter to the next state. To divide by N, the counter
is preset N states away from the load state. After N input pulses, the load state is reached and
an output pulse is generated. The counter is preset and the cycle is repeated. To divide by
N f. 5, the sequence is the same as that above except that for every other output pulse, the input
to the counter is inhibited for one input pulse. That is, the counter will alternately divide by
N and N+l, the average result is N+. 5. The division ratios for the COMM SMO are 30 1. 5 to
122. The chart relating preset state and selected channel for the COMM SMO appears in Table
4-3.
MHz KHz KHz
NI Preset MO Ml M2 M3 N2 Preset Koo K. Kl K2 K3 N3 Preset Kol
Figure 5-29 shows the integrated circuits as they appear on the COMM SMO Printed Circuit
Board and the COMM SMO schematic. The counter timing diagram appears in figures 5-2 1 and
5-22.
With the KHz knob set to the .X25 or . X75 positions (Kol =O, 1303 Pm 8 =l), the operation of the
KHz sections of the COMM and NAV Programmable Dividers are identical. 130 1B presets 130 1A
when the counter reaches the load state. During normal operation the J inputs, pins 13 and 14
are high, the I? input, pin 12 is high, and 1301B remains with Q high regardless of the Koo input
to pin 11. When the load state is reached, pin 6 of 1304 goes negative. If the preset input, 1301
pin 11 is high, the preset clock-pulse will drive Q of 1301B low. If the preset input, pin 11, has
been low the next pulse would leave Q of 1301B high. If pin 10 (Q) remains high then the K input
to 1301A remains high and 1301A continues to act as a toggle flip-flop. However, if pin 10 goes
low, 13OlA automatically shifts a high state to the Q output at pin 6. The divide by 2 function and
the preset waveform are illustrated in Figure 5-21 and 5-22.
With the KHz knob set to the . X00 or .X50 positions (K,l = l), the operation of the divider is as
follows. 1309B divides the output of the programmable divider by 2. When 130 1B Q output
(pin 9) goes to a “O”, 1309A is reset to a =“l” (pin 6) and 1303 pin 8 remains a “1”. Operation
of the divider is as described above. When the next divider output pulse occurs, 1309B, Q (pin 9)
output is clocked to a “I”, 1309A, Qremains at a “1” and 1303 pin 8 goes to a “0” inhibiting 1301.
(J and K inputs = “0’: therefore 1301 will not change state). When the next input clock pulse
occurs, 1309A is toggled to Q = “0” and 1303, pin 8 goes to a “l”, enabling 1301. The divider
l
now returns to normal operation and the cycle is repeated. By inhibiting the divider for one clock
pulse every other time the XXX. 5 average division ratios are accomplished.
The 9300 is a synchronous, 4 flip-flop shift register. Serial entry is available through the J-K
inputs during positive clock transitions. Parallel entry is through PO, Pl, P2, and P3 inputs
when simultaneouslv: the Parallel Enable (PE) port is low and the clock pulse (Cp) makes a posi-
tive transition. Outputs QO, &I, Q2, Q3,Q3 and an asynchronous master reset (MR) are externally
available.
1303D and I3 06 (KHz 9300) are connected to provide a 10 state shift counter (1OOKHz portion of
divider). 1304B is used to monitor a of 1301A and QO, Ql and Q3 of 1306. When the 4 inputs are
high, the output goes low. The next clock pulse toggles 1301A causing the output of 1304B to go
high providing the clock pulse to 1302 (MHz 9300). 1304B provides 1 output pulse for every 20
input pulses to 130 1A. See Figures 5-21 and 5-22.
1302 (MHz 9300) is wired to provide a 15 state counter. 1304A monitors the inverted clock pulse
and QO, Q2, and Q3 of 1302. The counter load state occurs when all of these inputs are high. In
the load state 1304 pin 6 goes to a “O”, providing a parallel enable to 1301, 1302, 1306, and 1309.
The next clock pulse transition strobes in the preset information.
1310, 1311, and 13 12 (1210, 12 11, 1212) form the phase and frequency comparator. The schematic
and component placement is shown in figure 5-29 (5-27) and the timing diagram in figure 5-23.
The 400KHz low frequency reference oscillator is divided by 1310 (1210) to provide a 25KHz
reference. 1311 (1211) C and D form a set-reset flipflop. This flip flop is used to provide phase
comparison of the programmable counter output and the 25KHz reference signal. When the
system is phase locked, 13 11 (12 1 l)A and 13 12 (12 12) B form a pulse generator which triggers on
the positive going edge of the reference 25KHz signal to set the set-reset flip flop and I311 (1211) B
and I3 12 (12 12)A form a pulse generator which triggers on the positive going edge of the variable
divider output to reset the set-reset flip flop. The output of the set-reset flip flop during phase
locked conditions is a square wave with a duty cycle proportional to the relative phase of the two
input s ignals.
When the system is out of lock, the programmable divider output frequency (13 12 pin 3 (12 12 pin 3)
will not equal 25KHz. If the frequency at 1312 (1212) pin 3 is greater than 25KHz, 1311 (1211) pin
11 will be low and the pulse width at 13 11 (12 11) pin 5 will vary. If the frequency at 13 12 (12 12)
pin 3 is less than 25KHz, 13 11 (I2 11) pin 11 will be high and the pulse width at 13 11 (12 11) pin 1 will
vary.
The basic transfer function of the Phase and Frequency Comparator is illustrated in Figure 5-23.
If power is turned on or channels are changed the appropriate high or low voltage is generated to
sweep the VCO toward the selected channel frequency, whereupon the VCO is captured by the
reference frequency with phase sensitive detector action.
When Q307 is biased off, the Transmit Buffer, Q306, and Receiver Buffer, Q303, are disabled.
During proper phase lock operation, the base of Q307 is high, saturating the transistor and
enabling the Transmit and Receive Buffers. If the loop fails to lock, either 1312 (1212) pin 8 or 6
will go high (See Figure 5-23) and Q318 will saturate, grounding the base of Q307. This inhibits
the Transmit and Receive Buffers.
Q3 17 (Q2 12) and associated components amplify the output of the Phase and Frequency Compara-
tor to obtain the proper voltage for the VCO control.
T307, T308 (T201, T208) and associated components form a 12. 5KHz (25KHz) low pass filterto
recover the DC component of the 25KHz square wave. This DC voltage is the VCO control voltage.
R326, R327, and C347 (R208, R209, and C210) form a lag-lead network which provides loop
stability.
Refer to KX 175 manual, paragraph 4.2.2.2 and figures 5-26 and 5-28 for VCO, Buffer Ampli-
fier, Implicit Divide by 2, and NAV High Frequency Oscillator Circuit Theory.
Q3 11, Y30 1, and Y302 form the COMM High Frequency Reference Oscillator. Y30 1 (7 1.0375MHz)
and C334 are selected for the high SMO band (127.00 - 135.975MHz) and Y302 (66. 5375MHz) and
C332 are selected for the low SMO band (118.00 - 126.975MHz). See Table 4-2 for correspond-
ing transmit and receive frequencies.
The KX 170B/KX 175B COMM receiver section is a dual conversion, superheterodyne receiver
with a 9. OMHz first I-F and a 861.25KHz second I-F frequency. 720 channels are synthesized at
the first mixer. Low side injection is used for channels 127.000 - 135. 975MHz and high side for
118.000 - 126.975MHz.
The received antenna signal is coupled to the preselector through a diode T/R switch. A 2-pole,
varactor tuned, R-F filter couples the antenna to the R-F stage. A second varactor tuned filter
couples the amplified R-F signal to the 1st mixer and supplies additional image and l/2 I-F
spurious rejection. The amplified R-F signal is mixed with the synthesized injection frequency
in a balanced mixer. A two pole (KX 170B) or 6 pole (KX 175B) crystal filter couples the differ-
ence frequency to the second mixer and provides image and l/2 I-F selectivity, The 8. 13875MHz
crystal controlled 2nd local oscillator develops injection for the 2nd mixer. The 2nd I-F contains
two integrated circuit (I-C) amplifiers with three double-tuned interstage networks for additional
receiver selectivity. An active detector/noise limiter provides audio gain, rate noise limiting,
and 90% AM clipping of noise spikes. A two stage AGC amplifier is used to AGC the R-F stage,
and the 1st I-C amplifier in the 2nd 1-F strin.
The receiver is approximately 6db into AGC with no input signal. This eliminates conventional
gainthreshold effects and establishes a constant “Signal plus noise” at the detector output. The
detector noise bandwidth is approximately 15KHz. A noise filter passes white noise containing
frequency components above 7KHz. The filtered noise is amplified and used to operate a squelch
gate. When detected white noise drops below a preset threshold, the squelch gate opens. If a
detected audio tone falls within the filter passband, it is treated as noise and blocks the squelch.
A carrier squelch overcomes this problem by opening the squelch gate when the AGC exceeds a
predetermined voltage. Receiver Audio passes through the volume control, an audio amplifier
and is coupled to the audio summing junction.
The summing junction accepts four auxilary audio inputs including NAV and Intercom Microphone.
A diode switch mutes the summing junction and connects the mike element to the audio power
amplifier during transmit. Headphone/sidetone is capacitively coupled from the audio drive
amplifier to the phone jack and is still operable with shorted audio output or R-F power transis-
tors. The push-pull audio amplifier supplies 6 watts to the balanced primary of the output trans-
former. The secondary includes separate speaker and modulation windings.
The transmitter is a solid state, 4 stage, broadband, 30db gain, R-F power amplifier. Collector
modulation is applied to the driver and final stages. The low pass filter provides harmonic
spurious rejection. COMM SMO band switching, speaker /modulator, headphone/sidetone and
antenna connections are controlled with a T/R relay, A series regulator supplies 8. 5 volts to
R-F/audio circuitry, and a zener regulator maintains 5. 0 volts to digital circuitry used in the
frequency synthesizers.
\
4.3.2 COMM TRANSCEIVER CIRCUIT THEORY
With the exception of the first I-F Filter, Audio Filter, Summing Junction T/R Switch, Audio
Power Amplifier and Voltage Regulators, the KX 170B/KX 175B is identical to theKX 170A/KX 175
Refer to paragraph 4. 3.2 of the KX 175 Maintenance Manual for COMM Transceiver Circuit
Theory not covered in this section.
The difference frequency (9MHz) is coupled through the crystal filter (FL403, KX 170B/FL405,
FL406, FL407, KX 175B) and applied to the base of the 2nd mixer, Q413. Tuned circuits, T414
and T415 provide reactive tuning of the crystal filter.
Resistor R703.-707, R729 and R722 provide a summing junction. In the receive condition, CR701
is reverse biased and CR702 is forward biased, passing audio to the audio pre-driver stage, Q701.
When the mike is keyed, the T/R relay grounds R721, which mutes CR702 audio and forward
biases CR70 1 applying mike audio to Q70 1.
Transistors Q70 l-706 are connected in a conventional audio power amplifier configuration.
Headphone sidetone is coupled from the primary of T701 through C717 and R730. Headphone
sidetone is obtained by connecting R719 in series and variable resistor, R726, in shunt with the
headphone during transmit.
Transistors Q102 and QlO5 form a series regulator element. Transistor Q104 compares the
attenuated output voltage at the wiper of pot R132 with the reference voltage at the cathode of
zener diode CR103. Additionally Q104 amplifies the error signal and provides negative feedback
to the base of QlO5. R134 and Q107 provide short circuit protection by limiting the regulator
output current.
Transistors QlOl and Q103 are connected to form a series pass element. Zener diode CR102,
provides reference voltage to the series pass element. R128 and QlOS provide short circuit
protection by limiting the regulator output current.
The KX 170B/KX 175B nTAV Receiver is identical to the KX 175 NAV Receiver. Refer to the
KX 175 Maintenance Manual, paragraph 4.4 for KX 170B/KX 175B NAV Receiver Circuit Theory.
5.1 GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance information contained in this section includes inspection procedures, cleaning,
semiconductor replacement, and troubleshooting procedures.
5. 1. 1 VISUAL INSPECTION
The following visual inspection procedures should be performed during the course of maintenance
operations.
a. .Inspect all wiring and coax cables for damaged insulation and proper termination (broken
strands and solder joint).
b. Check connectors cable connections, making sure they are free from corrosion and are
properly secured.
C. Check all components for evidence of overheating, discoloration, bulges or cracked housing.
d. Check all components for evidence of vibration, lead breakage and broken or insecure
mounting.
5. 1.2 C LEANING
a. Using a clean lint-free cloth lightly moistened with an approved cleaning solvent remove
the foreign matter from the equipment case and unit front panels. Wipe dry using a clean,
dry, lint-free cloth.
b. Using a hand controlled dry air jet (not more than 15 psi), blow the dust from inaccessible
areas. Care should be taken to prevent damage by the air blast.
C. Clean electrical contacts with a burnishing tool or cloth lightly moistened with an approved
contact cleaner,
d. Clean the receptacles and plugs with a hand controlled dry air jet (not more than 25 psi)
and a clean lint-free cloth lightly moistened with an approved cleaning solvent. Wipe dry
with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth.
5.1.4. 1 GENERAL
Due to the wide utilization of semiconductors in this electronic equipment, somewhat different
techniques are necessary in maintenance procedures. In solid state circuits the impedance and
resistances encountered are of much lower values than those encountered in vacuum-tube circuits.
Therefore, a few ohms discrepancy can greatly affect the performance of the equipment. Also,
coupling and filter capacitors are of larger values and usually are of the tantalum type. Hence,
when measuring resistances, an instrument very accurate in the low resistance ranges must be
used, and when measuring values of capacitors, an instrument accurate in the high ranges must
be employed. Capacitor polarity must be observed when measuring resistance. More accurate
measurements can be obtained if the semiconductors are removed or disconnected from the
circuit.
-NOTE-
C. Line Filter. It is still possible to damage semiconductors from line current, even though
the test equipment has a power transformer in the power supply, if the test equipment is *
provided iyith a line filter. This filter may function as a voltage divider and apply half
voltage to the semiconductor. To eliminate this condition, connect a ground wire from the
chassis of the test equipment to the chassis of the equipment under test before making any
other connections.
e. Power Supply. When using a battery-type power supply, always use fresh batteries of the
proper value. Make certain that the polarity of the power supply is correct for the equip-
ment under test. Do not use power supplies having poor voltage regulation.
5. 1. 5. 1 TESTING OF TRANSISTORS
-CAUTION-
b. PNP Transistor. To check a PNP transistor, connect the positive lead of the multimeter
to the base of the transistor and the negative lead to the emitter. Generally, a resistance
reading of 50,000 ohms or more should be obtained. Reconnect the multimeter with the
negative lead to the base. With the positive lead connected to the emitter a resistance
value of 500 ohms or less should be obtained. When the positive lead is connected to the
collector a value of 500 ohms or less should be likewise obtained.
C.. NPN Transistor. Similar tests made on an NPN transistor should produce the following
results: With the negative lead of the multimeter connected to the base of the transistor
the value of resistance between the base and the collector should be high. With the positive
lead of the multimeter connected to the base, the value of resistance between the base and
the emitter or base and the collector should be low’. If these results are not obtained, the
transistor is probably defective and should be replaced.
a. Never remove or replace a plug-in semiconductor with the supply voltage turned on. Tran-
sients thus produced may damage the semiconductor or others remaining in the circuit. i
If a semiconductor is to be evaluated in an external test circuit, be sure that no more
voltage is applied to the semiconductor than normally is used in the circuit from which it
came.
b. Use only a low heat soldering iron when installing or removing soldered-in-parts. Use
care in the handling of printed circuit boards. When removing a part from a printed cir-
cuit board, first unbend the crimped leads. Use only the necessary amount of heat to un-
solder the part. Clear excess solder from mounting eyelets, making sure that mounting
holes are clear before installing new parts. When removing a transformer or other part
having a multiple number of leads, straighten (unbend) all leads first and then heat leads
one at a time, working around the part, until the part can be gently ‘rocked out’.
C. When installing or removing a soldered-in semiconductor grasp the lead to which heat is
applied between the solder joint and the semiconductor with long-nosed ,pliers. This will
dissipate some of the heat that would otherwise conduct into the semiconductor from the
soldering iron. Make certain that all wires soldered to semiconductor terminals have first
been properly tinned so that the necessary connection can be made quickly. Excessive heat
will permanently damage a semiconductor.
3. In some cases, power transistors are mounted on heat-sinks that are designed to dissipate
heat away from them. In some power circuits, the transistor must also be insulated from
ground. Often, this insulating is accomplished by means of insulating washers made of
fiber and mica. When replacing transistors mounted in this manner, be sure that the in-
sulating washers are replaced in proper order. Before installing the mica washers, treat
them with a film of silicone grease. This treatment helps in the transfer of heat. After
the transistor is mounted, and before making any connections, check from the case of the
transistor to ground with a multimeter to see that the insulation is effective.
Precision voltage measurements are not needed in testing digital I. C. ‘s other than to see that
the voltage is a HI level or a LO level. An oscilloscope with a calibrated vertical and horizontal
axis is normally used in order to measure voltages of short duration or to measure the relation-
ship of two voltage pulses.
a. A Truth Table of the logic element under question is the primary tool to be used. When
checking input and output levels of a logic element under question it should be remembered
that an input or output may not agree with its truth table not because it has malfunctioned
but because some other component connected to the same point has shorted to g-round or to
vcc. This is not uncommon when an output of one element is connected to an input or out-
put of another. It may be necessary to isolate the gate under question by unsoldering the
necessary I. C. pins. A majority of digital I. C. failures can be grouped into three cate-
gories.
An input or output shorted to ground would be a constant LO and an input or output shorted to
V cc would be a constant HI. An open input would not cause any change in the output’ state.
An open output would be less than 0. 5VDC.
inputs shorted together can be checked by grounding one of the inputs under question. If
the other input also goes to ground they are probably shorted.
If an I. C. is known to be defective, the easiest way to remove it is to cut off each of its pins,
remove the case, and then unsolder the remaining pins from the integrated circuit card one by
one. This is preferable over removing the I. C. intact because attempts to remove an I. C.
intact may result in damage to the printed circuit board. If it is desired to remove an I. C. in-
tact, a soldering iron with a special tip may be used that will heat all the pins on the backside of
the card at the same time. After removal the holes of the card should be cleaned of solder so
that the replacement I. C. may be installed. Note the marking identation of the I. C. before re-
moval, and replace the new one with the same orientation as the one removed.
-CAUTlON-
Never remove or replace a plug in I. C. with the supply voltage turned on. Transients thus
produced may damage the I. C. or others remaining in the circuit. If an I. C. is to be evaluated
in an external test circuit, be sure no more voltage is applied to the I. C. than normally is used
in the circuit from which it came.
The KX 170B/KX 175B uses transistor-transistor logic only (TTL). The logic functions are
shown in Figures 5-l and 5-2
I. GATES
Inputs outputs
All high (1) Low (0)
Any low (0) High (1)
TTL
JKK
001
Q after
next clock
Output
pulse
unchanged
Jb)
Q CP
0 10
110
10 1
0
Output
1
changes state II K(c)
S RDQQ
110 0 1 After next
1 1 1 1 0 clock pulse
0 1 - 1 03 Independent
10-O 1 of clock
.
Change
of state caused by clock pulse positive transition.
FIGURE 5-l BASIC LOGIC FUNCTIONS
(Dwg; No. 696 -6109-00)
Al BINARY RESET 6) SHIFT PRESET
+5VDC COUNTER
COUNTER 9
,-I !NPUT
-
-J P, . J Q
---c -c
320 320 320 320
4p” -_. 0 .c- .K is \KT
(8)
‘1 ( (C)) (0)
QEIGHTED CODE I 2 4 B WEIGHTED ( z- A B C D
-
3ESET STATE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I I 0 0 0 I I 0 0 0
2 0 I 0 0 2 0 I 0 0
3 II00 3 I 0 I 0
4 0 0 I 0 4 0 I ‘0 I
5 I 0 I 0 SELECTED 5 0 0 I 0
6 0 I I 0 PRESET 6 I 0 0 I
STATES
SELECTED 7 I I I 0 7 I I 0 0
LOAD B 0 0 0 1 G 0 I I 0
STATES 9 I 0 0 I 9 I 0 I I
IO 0 I 0 I IO I I 0 I
II I I 0 I II I I I 0
I2 0 0 I I 12 0 I I I
13 I 0 I I I3 0 0 I I
I4 0 I I’ I LOAD STATE ; 0 0 0 I
I5 I I I I
Page 5-6 FIGURE 5-2 RESET AND PRESET COUNTERS February, 1973
(Dwg. No. 696-60 16 -00)
KX 170B /KX 175B
KlNG
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
5.2 ALIGNMENT
ANDTESTPROCEDURE
The following test equipment, or equivalent, is required to properly align and test the KX 170B/
KX 175B System. All test equipment must be properly calibrated before alignment and tests are
started.
b. Remove three screws on each side of the COMM SMO tray and one screw at the front.
Pivot the COMM SMO up and over the front of the radio.
C. Remove two screws in center area of NAV SMO cover and remove cover.
e. Apply 13.75 volts to NAV Receiver (switch power on NAV only) and observe voltage at
CR214, if greater than 5. 75 volts, switch power off to avoid I. C. damage. If OK proceed
to next step.
f. Connect a digital voltmeter to the anode lead of CR101 at NAV Voltage Regulator and ob-
serve an 8.3 f. 5 volts indication on voltmeter.
g. NAV Receiver power requirements are 13.75 volts input at . 52 amp with no modulated RF
signal present.
i. Connect a digital voltmeter to TP 201 and adjust L201 for 7. BOOVDC tuning (VCO) voltage.
j. (Optional) NAV SMO frequency stability and tuning (VCO) voltage may be observed simul-
taneously by connecting a frequency counter to the coax side of C231 10pf disc capacitor)
and connecting a digital voltmeter to the tuning voltage line (red wire at C258 feed thru
capacitor).
Channel the NAV frequency selector through the following frequencies, comparing the frequency
and tuning (VCO) voltage with Table 5-l.
k. Replace NAV SMO cover and install the two screws previously removed.
a. Remove the two screws and top cover from the COMM SMO.
d. Apply 13.75 volts to COMM Receiver (switch power on COMM only) and observe voltage at
CR319, if greater than 5.75 volts, switch power off to avoid I. C. damage. If OK proceed
to next step.
e. Connect a digital voltmeter to the anode lead of CR104 at COMM Voltage Regulator and
adjust R132 for 8. 500 VDC.
f. Recheck voltage at TP310 for 5. 1 f. 5V, if out of tolerance switch power off and check.
g. COMM Receiver power requirements are 13, 75 volts input at . 70 amp with no modulated
RF signal present.
i. Set the COMM frequency selector to 126. 975MHz and adjust C315 for 7. OOVDC VCO tuning
voltage at TP301.
j,’ Set the COMM frequency selector to 135. 975MHz and adjust C314 for 7. OOVDC VCO tuning
voltage at TP301.
1. (Optional) COMM SMO frequency stability and VCO voltage may be observed simultaneous-
ly by connecting a frequency counter to TP303 and connecting a digital voltmeter to TP301.
Channel the COMM frequency selector through the following frequencies, comparing the frequen-
cy and VCO voltage with Table 5-2.
m. Remove the temporary mounting screws and position COMM SMO cover in place with the
two screws previously removed.
n. Mount the COMM SMO tray with three screws on each side and one screw at the front,
P. With the COM Frequency selector set to 122. 50MHz, adjust C334 in COMM SMO for
131. 500000MHz at point “Y”.
9. With the COM Frequency selector set to 131. 50, adjust C332 in COM SMO for 122. 500000
MHz at point “Y”.
a. .Remove the receiver board retaining screws (5 places) noting the position of the ground
lug. Loosen the two hinge pivot screws. Pivot the board 90” and retighten the hinge pivot
screws.
b. Connect a digital voltmeter to the COMM receiver tuning voltage (TP408) and verify the
tuning voltage versus channel frequency of Table 5-3.
C. Connect a frequency counter to point “Y” of Figure 5-4 and verify the SMO frequency
versus channel frequency of Table 5-3.
d. Set NAV channel selector to 117. 95MHz and connect a digital voltmeter to the NAV
receiver tuning voltage test point (TP401) and observe 7. 20VDC. If correct verify the
tuning voltage versus channel frequency of Table 5-4. If not 7. BOVDC, L201 may be
adjusted through access hole in bottom of NAV SMO tray. Refer to 5. 2. 1 for adjustment
procedures. r
e. Connect a frequency counter to point “X” of Figure 5-4 and verify the SMO frequency
versus channel frequency of Table 5-4.
-NOTE-
a. Test points and alignment references maybe located on Figure 5-4, and 5-26.
b. Apply 13. 75VDC to unit and place the NAV “OFF-VOICE-IDENT” switch in the “IDENT”
position.
e. Set the RF signal generator output for 10~~ hard at a frequency of 108. OOOMHz (use
frequency counter) and connect to NAV antenna input connector.
a. Preliminary - If receiver is badly out of alignment, peak all tuning adjustments (2nd IF,
1st IF and RF).
5. 2. 4. 3 2nd I. F. ALIGNMENT
a. Load point W (L401) to ground with 220R and repetitively peak (L403) and (L405) until no
further improvement.
a. Set the NAV “OFF-VOICE-LDENT” switch in the “VOICE” position. RF input, 30%
externally modulated with 1020Hz audio signal. (Use frequency counter, )
a. Modulate the VHF generator with a Standard LOC Modulation Signal from the VOR/LOC
generator.
d. Adjust R425 for 0. 35 volt RMS LOC output at TP407 (VOR/LGC output),
-NOTE-
a. Test points and alignment references may be located on Figures 5-4, 5-26 and 5-26A.
b. Apply 13. 75VDC to unit and place the “OFF-ON-TEST” switch in the “TEST” position
(squelch open).
e. Set the RF signal generator output for 20~~ hard at a frequency 9. OOMHz below the freq-
uency measured at point “Y” (use frequency counter) and connect to COMM antenna input
connector.
5.2.5.2 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
a. Preliminary-If receiver is badly out of alignment, peak all tuning adjustments (2nd IF,
1st IF and RF).
5. 2. 5. 3 2nd I. F. ALIGNMENT
5. 2. 5. 4 I. F. ALIGNMENT
Repetitively peak T414 and T415 until no further improvements is noted, (no load used).
a. Signal Generator R-F, 8570 externally modulated with a 8. OkHz audio signal.
C. Adjust L414 for maximum amplitude and, or maximum clipping observed on oscilloscope.
a. Set the COMM “OFF-ON-TEST” switch to the “ON” position (squelch operative).
C. Set the RF signal generator to 118. OOMHz modulated 3070 with a 1OOOHz audio signal, to
3 hard pv output.
C. Set the R-F signal generator to 126. 7OMHz. 85% externally modulated with a 8. OkHz audio
signal, to25 pv hard output.
C. Set the RF Signal generator to 126. 7MHz, 300/o externally modulated with a 4kHz audio
signal, to 1OOclv hard output.
5. 2. 6 TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT
Connect the bench test set for COMM transmitter tests (Figure 5-8) and apply 13. 75 volts.
d. Set the COMM frequency selector to 126. 70MHz and depress the microphone key.
e. Using a nonmetallic tuning tool, adjust trimmer capacitors C610, C619 and C622 for
maximum CW power.
f. Check the output power at the band edges (118. 00, 135. 975MHz) for symmetrical roll-off.
a. Obtain a Standard Modulation Signal for mike audio input. (See Note)
b. Simultaneously key the transmitter, apply a Standard Modulation Signal and observe the
detector waveform on the oscilloscope.
C. Adjust the mike gain control (R709) so that modulation peaks are on the threshold of
clipping.
5. 2. 6. 3 COMM Transmitter power requirements are 13. 75 volts input at 2. 8 amp unmodulated
and 4. 5 amps tone modulated.
a. Simultaneously key the transmitter and apply a Standard Modulation Signal. (See Note)
b. Adjust the sidetone level control, R726 for 1. 0 milliwatt undistorted output, across a 600
ohm load at COMM 500 ohm output.
3. All Navigation Receiver measurements (both Omni and Localizer) are to be made only after
the VOR/LOC output level of the Kx 170B/KX 175B has been properly set. With the
KX 170B / KX 175B connected to either a KI 201C or KI 2 11C and a standard LOC signal of
1000~~ (hard) applied and the receiver adjusted for 0. 35VRMS LOC output, This output
level is correct for both omni and localizer operation.
4. A transmitter standard modulation signal is a 1kHz tone with 0. 4 VRMS open circuit
voltage as illustrated in the test circuit (Figure 5-3).
/?j,,-i:;;:::RCU.T
mm----
BNC
INPUT
4.7 K
1
IOjih
5 vi,
-OUTPUT
BNC
I
MINIMUM. STRAY
CAPACITANCE 1
I
I----m-M
RF ATT ENUATED
I NPU
RF OUTPUT
696-6050-00
-e
r
42PIN AMPHENOL
- 1
5171
1\ NAV. +13.75VDC
POWER INPUT
20 m +13.75VDC
LAMP DIM'R.
33
21 POWERGND.
T e GROUND
1
LAMP DIM'R. GND. T
38 r----i
COMM. SWITCHED BUSS , 47K VORiLOC 1
17 L IMPEDANCE
COMM. +13.75VDC --I l
18 I I 0.35vEws ,
VOR/LOC OUTPUT LOC SIGNAL
3 n
&----_1
AUX. AUDIO #l IN
36
NAV. 500noUT NAV. PHONE
35 bin
=
41 SPKR. 4noUT
SPKR. 600n
SPKR. GND.
LINEAR OSCILLOSCOPE
DETECTOR
L Receiver Sensitivity:
3. Selectivity:
Transmitter Frequency Stability after a two hou r off period at +25”C the allowable
tolerance is X). 6OOKHz:
118. 000 kHz 125.475 kHz 131. 875 kHz
119. 025 kHz 126. 975 kHz 132. 900 -kHz
120.050 kHz 127. 000 kHz 133. 925 -kHz
121.075 kHz 128. 500 kHz 134. 950 -kHz
122.100 kHz 129. 625 kHz 135. 975 kHz
123. 225 kHz 130. 750 kHz
124. 350 kHz
5. Headphone Audio: mw
Transmitter:
1. Power Out:
Low Voltage:
2. Modulation: Capabilities
Hardware ok Tested by
Paperwork ok Inspected by
Glyptol ok
Test Stamp ok
NAVIGATION RECEIVER
Serial #
Date
OMNI
3. AG C Characteristic: degrees
4. Course Accuracy: A 0, B 0.
LOCALLZER
AUDIO
1. Sensitivity:
4. Audio Output:
6. Selectivity:
MECHANICAL:
Hardware (ok)
Paperwork (ok)
Glyptol (ok)
Test Stamp (ok)
0
2 NO
4
0 3
- YES
A
T 9
COMM AUDIO OK L - TRANSMITTER TRANSMITTER CW YES
NAV INDICATION OK NAV. AUDIO OK NAV AUDIO OK COMM AUDIO OK * MODU~AT’ON SET MIKE CAIN
YES YES YES YES CW POWER OK AT YES FREO.OK ON ALL CAPABILITY YES
ON I I3 5 MHz WITH - W’TH ‘I3 5 MHz ) ON ALL KHz t 20ea) - ‘26.700 MHz - ALL KHz (40ea.I c POT
‘020 Hz, 30% NO MHz(lBea) AND ALL NO OK WITH IKHz
STANDARD NAV. SIG.? AND ALL MHz (IO ea)? ALL MHz ( I8 ea)? m ‘26.700MHz ? PER SEC. 5.2.6.2
(VOICE / IDENT) ? 1020 Hz, 30% ‘? KHz FRED ‘40eo)? - (.I25 VRMS)?
f1
I I 1
I
NAV. AUDIO OK
YES
CHECK VORILOC
.
L YES
REPAIR
VOLTAGE TRANSMITTER
-
NO REPAIR AS IN CHECK MODULATOF;
ON LEVELADJUST r-i REGULATOR I COAX $ DIODE
SEC. 5.9 PER SEC. 5.8
13.75VDC TO 1 I SWITCH OK?
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE I
REGULATOR
REGULATOR
OK? YES
OK?
- -
H
NO CHECK RELAY
VOLTAGE REGULATOR 3 VOLTA\GE REGULATOR 13-75 VDC TO
INTERCONNECT
OK? TRANSMITTER
OK ?
I I CHECK 1 YES
OK ?
I
YES INTERCONNECT
NO
Y ON-OFF SWITCH
I
TRANSMITTER TROUBLESHOOT
YES
NO b TRANSMITTER
b EXCITATION LEVEL -
1 DETECTOR DOES CR431 AND FREQ. OK? PER SEC. 5.9
CHECK AUDIO = HAVE FORWARD
YES INTERCONNECT, BIAS VOLTAGE? L
OK? TP4lO
- RELAYS,ON-OFF SW.,
+
AUDIO POWER AMPL. I
DETECTO;NAUDIO OK AUDIO OK ON
NO
PIN 35 OF Jl7’ ?
I ‘3 5 MHz ?
REPAIR AUDIO 7
1 coRREcr~i26700MHZ,~
NO
REPAIR NAV.
n
RECEIVER
PER
SECTION 5.6
I PER SEC 5.7
I
5.3 TROUBLESHOOTI#6
THEKX 17OB/KX 1758
Figure 5- 9 is a troubleshooting flow chart designed to aid the technician in sectionalizing or
localizing sources of trouble. NAV and COMM block diagrams Figure 5-24 and 5-25 appearing
at the end of Section 5 may also aid in localizing the malfunction, The troubleshooting charts
(Table 5-5 thru 5-9) are given as a quick guide in pinpointing probable problem areas along with
their associated remedies. A list of possible SMO malfunctions is given in the Preliminary
Evaluation section of the respective SMO discussions (NAV SMO, Section 5,4, COMM SMO,
Section 5. 5).
Individual circuit tracing and isolation of a defective component is most easily accomplished by
use of the individual troubleshooting sections, along with appropriate schematic diagrams appear-
ing at the end of Section 5.
Low or no output from Voltage Regulated Supply Check QlOl, Q103 and
Receiver Buffer (8. 5 and 5. 0 volts) com- CR214 voltages and
ponent failure. associated components.
Frequency error and/ or Phase and Frequency com- Check 1210, 1211, and
jitter in Receiver Buffer- parator component failure. 1212 voltages and asso-
output. ciated components.
Page 5-28
KX 170B/KX
KlNG
175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
Low or no output from Voltage Regulated Supply Check Q102, Q105, Q104
Receiver Buffer (8:5 and 5. 0 volts) com- and CR319 voltages and
ponent failure. associated components.
Receiver Buffer output Transmit Buffer component Check Q306 voltages and
but no Transmit Buffer failure. associated components.
output in Transmit
condition. Transmit Enable Switch Check Q305 voltages and
component failure. associated components.
Receiver Buffer and/or COMM MHz HI-LO switch Check switch wafer S103
Transmit Buffer, fre-
quency incorrect from Transmit-Receive Relay Check relay K701.
118. 00 to 126. 95MHz
but OK from 127. 00 to High Reference Crystals Check Y301 and Y302 and
135MHz or vice versa. associated components.
Stable frequency error Low Reference Oscillator Check for 400KHz input tc
in Receiver and T rans- 400KHz, (in NAV SMO TP305 (from NAV SMO
mit Buffer output. KX 170B) (in COMM SMO KX 170B) (Q315 and Q31’6
KX 175B). voltages and associated
components KX 175B).
Frequency error and,! 3r Phase and Frequency -Check 1310, 1311, and
jitter in Receiver and C lmparator component 1312 voltages and asso-
Transmitter Buffer output. failure, ciated components.
--.:
Frequency error and/or Low Referen’ce Oscillator Check for 400KHz input tc
jitter in Receiver and 400KHz (in NAV SMO KX 170B) T P305.
Transmitter Buffer output. (in COMM SMO KX 175B)
5.4 TROUBLESHOOTIN
THE NAV SMO
The KX 170B/KX 175B NAV SMO analog circuitry is identical to that of the KX 170A/KX 175 .
See the KX 175 Maintenance Manual for troubleshooting procedures not covered in this section.
F. Mixer
G. Squaring Amplifier
J
II. Does the Programmable Divider Provide Proper Frequency Division?
Maintain the channel setting and the VCO tuning voltage of Steps D through G. Attach the oscillo-
scope probe to Pin 9 of 1202 or 1206 to monitor the counter output. The waveform of Figure 5- 10
should be obtained. Note the pulse period of approximately 40psec. Dial the ten MHz positions,
leaving the VCO bias unchanged, and look for the counter output pulse rate to increase uniformly
as lower channel frequencies are dialed. Return the MHz dial to the 116MHz position and dial
through the twenty KHz positions. Observe a gradual advance in output pulse rate as numbers
are dialed from the 0. 95 to . 00 using counterclockwise rotation.
If erroneous operation of the Programmable Counter is observed, service the counter using the
procedure of Section 5. 4. 3.
Connect the oscilloscope probe to the junction of Pins 4, 9 and 11 of 1211 and R215 to monitor the
Phase and Frequency Comparator output. With the channel selector at 116. 70MHz, vary the
VCO bias voltage above and below 6. 50 volts. The output voltage on the scope should be dominat-
ely low wheri the VCO bias is low, and high when the VCO bias is high. Waveforms are illustrat-
ed in the Phase and Frequency Comparator Timing Diagrams of Figure 5-23. If a malfunction is
noted, troubleshoot the circuit as illustrated in Section 5. 4.4.
Repeat the test of Step I but with the oscilloscope probe attached to TP202. Waveforms are
illustrated in Figure 5-11. Service the circuit as required using the reference information of
Section 5. 4. 8.
Troubleshoot the remaining block, the VCO Low Pass Filter per the discussion of Section 5. 4. 7.
The Programmable Divider consists of integrated circuits 1201, 1202, 1204, 1206 and gates A and
D in 1203. Reference material includes the divider theory of Section 4 and the Timing Diagram
of Figure 5 -20,
5. 4. 3. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure.
I. Test Setup
A. Open either end of L204, the Mixer LOW Pass Filter choke.
B. Use a coaxial pigtail to connect an HP 606A, or equivalent, to the tie point of C240 and
C241.
B. Adjust the HP 606A CW level to obtain a crisp square wave (0 volts base line, 4 volts
peak line) at TP206, when viewed by a 30MHz bandwidth or wider oscilloscope.
III. Observations
A. Use a 30MHz bandwidth (or wider) oscilloscope. Provide external sync from the lead- @
ing edge of the pulse appearing at 1202 or 1206 Pin 9.
B. Compare the waveform at Pin 6 of 1204 to the timing diagrams. (Figure 5-20) The
desired output is a pulse train with a 4 volt reference level, a 40psec period (25KHz
rep rate), negative pulse width of approximately 2lOnsec, and 0 volts negative excur-
sion.
E. Failure to meet the requirements of Step C implies a problem with the preset function
of the Programmable Divider. Make a complete check of the divider flip-flops im-
mediately preceding and following the preset enable pulse (negative pulse on pin 6 of
1204. The desired preset states are defined in Table 4-3 (KX 175 Manual) where 0 is
ground and 1 is 5 volts, and should occur immediately following the preset enable
pulse. Also review Figure 5-20.
F. Replace components and make repairs as necessary to obtain the desired counter
operation. a
The Phase and Frequency Comparator consists of 1211 and 1212. Reference information sources
include the Phase and Frequency Comparator Timing Diagram (Figure 5-23) and the theory of
section 4. 2.
-NOTE-
A. Connect an external power supply to the VCO bias test point TP201.
D. Adjust the VCO bias voltage low (less than 6. 50 volts) and look for a low output voltage
(around . 2 volts). Refer to Figure 5-23 for the appropriate timing diagram.
E. Adjust the VCO bias voltage high (greater than 6. 50 volts) and look for a high voltage out-
put voltage (near 4. OV). Refer to Figure 5-23 for the- appropriate timing.
F. Failure to meet the conditions of Steps C and D requires a systematic comparison of the
input (output) relationships obtained to those appearing in either the Timing Diagram or the
functioning COMM SMO.
The Low Reference Oscillator consists of transistors Q210 (Q315) and Q211 (Q316). with crystal
Y202 (Y303) as the frequency determining element. The Low Reference Oscillator serves both
the NAV and COMM SMO’s. (KX 170B only).
5. 4. 5. 1 Troubleshooting Procedures.
Using an oscilloscope check TP205 (TP305) for a square wave output (See Figure 5-15). Capa-
citively couple a frequency counter to TP205 (TP305) and check for 400KHz. Check Q210 (Q315)
and Q211 (Q316) and the associated circuitry. See Figure 5-27 and 5-29 for typical D-C operat-
ing voltage levels.
5. 4. 6. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure.
Compare the supply and bias voltages for Q201 with those appearing in Figure 5-27 and replace
components as necessary to obtain proper bias. Apply a 7. 2 volt tuning bias voltage, from a
low impedance source, to TP201 and use a frequency counter to monitor the frequency at the
collector of Q201. Adjust L201 to obtain a frequency of approximately 102. 7625. The VCO
frequency should vary proportionately.as the tuning voltage is varied. If erratic or erroneous
operation is obtained, check the frequency determining elements. Failure of the VCO to oscil-
late implies an open varactor diode (CR201), an open trimmer coil (L201), or a bad transistor
(Q201).
The VCO Low Pass Filter consisting of T201, T208, C211, C212, C213 and C271 is a low pass fil-
ter designed to recover the D-C voltage from the output of the 25KHz Voltage Translator. It
has been factory adjusted and no attempt should be .rrade to readjust in the field.
5.4. 7.1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Using an oscilloscope, check wave form of the input at
TP202. Using a D-C voltmeter, check for a D-C voltage at TP201 (7. 20VDC at 117.95MHz to
2.84VDC at 108. OOMHz).
The Voltage Translator consists of transistor Q202 which shifts the error voltage level from
the Phase and Frequency Comparators to a level sufficient to operate the VCO.
5.4.8.1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Using an oscilloscope trace the input signal from R215
to the output of TP202. See Figure 5-27 for typical D-C operating voltage levels.
The Receiver Buffer consists of transistor, Q202, with output transformer, T202.
5.4. 9.1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Using an oscilloscope, trace the input signal from C216
to the output at Pin 2 of T202. See Figure 5-27 for typical D-C operating voltage levels.
The VCO Buffer consists of transistor Q203 with output transformer T203.
5. 4. 10. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Using an oscilloscope, trace the input signal from
C220 to the output at T203. See Figure 5-27 for typical D-C operating voltage levels.
The High Frequency Oscillator consists of transistor Q207 connected in a typical Colpitts con-
figuration with crystal Y201 determining the operating frequency.
5. 4. 11. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Check Pin 6 of T207 for oscillator output. Check
supply and biasing voltage (See Figure 5-27 for typical D-C operating voltage levels. )
The Implicit Divide by 2 circuit consists of balanced mixer CR203, CR204, CR205 and CR206
and amplifier $206. For circuit theory refer to Section 4. 2.
This is a balanced mixer consisting of transformer T206 and T207 with diodes CR207, CR208,
CR209 and CR210.
5. 4. 13. 1 Troubleshooting procedure. With the power removed from the KX 170B /KX 17 5B
and using an ohmmeter, check all diodes for a possible open. Check all transformer windings
for D-C continuity.
The Mixer Low Pass Filter is a basic pi-section low pass filter consisting of inductor L204 and
capacitors C239 and C240.
5. 4. 14. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Using an oscilloscope trace the signal from the out-
put of the 2nd Mixer (Pin 2 of T206) to the input of the Squaring Amplifier (base Q208).
5. 4. 15. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Using an oscilloscope check for Mixer output at the
base of Q208. Check TP206 for a 4 volt square wave output. Check transistor Q208 and Q209
and associated circuitry. See Figure 5-27 for typical D-C operating voltage levels (with the
base of Q208 bypassed).
5.5 TROUBLESHOOTIN
THECOMMSMO
The COMM SMO synthesizes 720 frequencies, providing a power level of 10mw into a 5Ofi load.
The relationship of channel frequency to synthesized frequency is illustrated in Table 5-10.
Theory of Operation is presented in Section 4.
LO BAND HI BAND
, l
Selected Synthesizer Selected Synthesizer
Channel Frequency Channel Frequency
(MHz) Receiver (MHz) (MHz) Receiver (MHz)
3. Is the synthesized frequency correct when dialing through all KHz (40 ea. ) and
all MHz (18 ea. ) positions with both clockwise and counterclockwise rotation.
1. Check all power and control lines to the COMM SMO for proper operation.
Wire color and feedthru assignment are shown in Figure 5-29. Control wire
functions are defined in Table 4-3 where “0” is ground and “1” is 5VDC.
2. Does the NAV SMO supply a 4OOKHz reference to the COMM SMO?
(Kx 170B Only)
If the tests of 5. 5.1 substantiate the COMM SMO failure, proceed as follows:
Using a 1Kpf coupling capacitor connect a VHF freqency counter to the junction of CJ301 and
CJ302 in the High Reference Oscillator and check for 71.0375 +lKHz when a low band (118. OO-
126.975MHz) frequency, or 66. 5375 flKHz when a high band 127.00-135.975MHz frequency has
been selected on the COMM frequency dial. If the oscillator is inoperative or off frequency,
refer to Section 5. 5. 10 for servicing information.
Connect a frequency coi inter to TP305 1 and 1neasure 400,000 (+20, -1O)Hz. Remoi re the counter,
connect an oscilloscope to TP305 and obser ‘ve the waveform. The proper wavefor m is shown in
Figure 5-13 below.
-NOTE-
Dial 126. 7OMHz on the COMM frequency selector, and adjust the VCO bias voltage to 6.85V.
Connect a VHF counter to the Receiver Buffer, TP303, and adjust C315 to obtain a frequency
of approximately 135. 70MHz.
Change the COMM frequency selector dial to 135. 70MHz and adjust C314,to obtain a frequency
of approximately 126. 7OMHz. Erratic or improper tuning, or low output should be corrected
by troubleshooting the VCO and/or VCO Buffer as outlined in Sections 5. 5. 5 and 5. 5. 9.
Without altering the tuning voltage or the channel frequency setting, connect the VHF counter
to TP304 and read a frequency of approximately 63.35MHz. Change the COMM frequency
selector dial back to 126.70MHz and read a frequency of approximately 67.85MHz on the
counter. If a malfunction is observed, the circuit may be serviced using the troubleshooting
instructions of Section 5.5.11.
With 126. 70 selected and 6.85VDC bias applied to the VCO, as in previous steps, connect an
oscilloscope to the junction of L305, C376 and C377. The waveform should be one of the
February, 1973
Page 5-40
KIN
Kx 170B 5;KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
s
Failure to obtain the desired trace would indicate a malfunction in the Mixer circuit which can
be serviced using the troubleshooting information of Section 5. 5. 12.
With the VCO oscillating at 135.7OMHz (COMM frequency selector 126. 7OMHz), monitor the
Squaring Amplifier output, TP306, with an oscilloscope having a bandwidth of at least 3OMHz.
If the reference oscillator is functioning properly, the waveform will appear as in Figure 5-15.
If not, troubleshoot the squaring amplifier as in Section 5. 5. 14.
Page 5-41
February, 1973
KlNG
KX 170B/KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
Horizontal: 0. bsec/div
Vertical: 1V /div
Selected Freq. : 126. 70MHz
Maintain the channel setting and the VCO tuning voltage of steps D through G. Attach the os-
cilloscope probe to the junction of 1304, pin 6; 1302, pin 9; 1306, pin 9, and 1312, pin 3 to
monitor the counter output. The waveform of Figure 5-16 should be obtained. Note the pulse
period of 401.1sec. Dial the eighteen MHz positions, leaving the VCO bias unchanged, and look
for the counter output pulse rate to increase uniformly as lower channel frequencies are
dialed. Return the MHz dial to the 126MHz position and dial through the forty KHz positions.
Observe a gradual decrease in output pulse rate as numbers are dialed from the 0. 97 to 0.00
using counterclockwise rotation.
If erroneous operation of the Programmable Counter is observed, service the counter using
the procedure outlined in Section 5. 5. 3.
February, 19 73
KI G
7
JCX 170B KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER /
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
Connect the oscilloscope probe to the tie point of Pins 4, 9, and 11 of 1311 and R333 to monitor
the Phase and Frequency Comparator output. With the COMM channel selector at 126.7OMHz,
vary the VCO bias above and below 6.85 volts. The output voltage on the scope should be
dominately low when the VCO bias is low, and high when the VCO bias is high. Waveforms
are illustrated in the Phase and Frequency Comparator timing diagrams of Figure 5-23. If a
malfunction is noted, troubleshoot the circuit as instructed in Section 5. 5.4.
Repeat the test of Step I but with the oscilloscope probe attached to TP302. Waveforms are
illustrated in Figure 5-17and 5-23. Troubleshoot the circuit as required using the infor-
mation given in Section 5. 5.7.
(a) VCO frequency and bias voltage high (b) VCO frequency and bias voltage low.
Service the remaining block, the VCO Low Pass Filter. Compare waveform of the input at
TP302. Using a DC Voltmeter check the DC voltage at TP301 (7.00 VDC at 135.975 and
126.975MHz, 2. 58 VDC at 118. 000 and 127. OOOMHz). (See Figure 5-19)
The Programmable Divider consists of integrated circuitsI.301, 1302, 1304, 1306, 1309, and
gates A and D in 1303. Reference material includes the divider theory of Section 4.2 and the
Timing Diagram of Figure 5-21 and 5-22.
I. Test Setup.
A. Open either en,Jof L305, the Mixer Low Pass Filter choke.
B. Use a coaxial pigtail to connect an H/P 606A or equivalent, to the tie point of C376
and C377.
B. Adjust the H/P 606CW level to obtain a crisp square wave (0 volts base line, 4 volts
peak line) at TP306, when viewed by an oscilloscope having a 3OMHz or wider
bandwidth.
III. Observations
B. Compare the waveform at Pin 6 of 1304 to the equivalent point in the NAV
SMO or to ‘the timing diagram (See Figure 5-21 and 5-22). The desired
output is a pulse train with a 40 ~.lsec. period (25KHz rep. rate), at 0 volts
base line, +4.0 volt level.
The Phase and Frequency Comparator consists of 1311 and 1312. Reference information sources
include the Phase and Frequency Comparator Timing Diagram (Figure 5-23) and the theory of
section p. 2.
-NOTE-
A. Connect an external power supply to the VCO bias test point TP301.
C. Adjust the VCO bias voltage low (less than 6. 50 volts 122. 50) and look for a low output
voltage (around .2 volts. ) Refer to Figure 5-23 for the appropriate timing diagram.
D. Adjust the VCO bias voltage high (greater than 6. 50 volts) and look for a high voltage
output voltage (near 4. 5V). Refer to Figure 5-23 for the appropriate timing diagram.’
The Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) consists of transistor Q302, Varactor diode CR303,
with frequency adjust capacitors C314 and C315 and HI-LO VCO switching transistor Q301.
Diodes CR301 and CR302 disable the VCO transistor Q302 when the COMM frequency selector
wafter is dialed to a nonvalid COMM channel. In the low portion of the COMM band (118.00 -
126.975MHz), the Hi line is grounded on receive and the “Lo” line is grounded on transmit.
Therefore, in receive the “Hi” line forward biases CR301 applying bias to Q302 for normal
operation. CR302 is reverse biased by R346 (High Reference Oscillator Section). In the high
portion of the COMM band (127. 00-135. 975MHz) the “Lo” line is grounded on receive and the “Hi”
line is grounded on transmit. Therefore, in receive the “Lo” line, forward biases CR302
which again applies bias to Q302. At the same time, the “Lo” line enables VCO switch Q301,
placing trimmer C314 in parallel with C315. CR301 is reverse biased by R347 (High Reference
Oscillator Section). a
5. 5. 5.1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Check the supply and bias voltages of Q302. Check for
proper operation of the Hi-Lo switching wafer and associated diodes CR301 and CR302.
Make repairs as necessary to obtain proper operating conditions. Supply a 7.0
volt bias voltage from a low impedance source to TP301 and monitor the VCO output frequency
by capacitively coupling a frequency counter to the collector of Q302 with a 1OOpf diskcap. With
the frequency selector at 126. 97MHz adjust C315 to get a frequency of approximately 135. 975MHz.
If this is unattainable, verify that Q301, is turned off and check the frequency determining ‘ele-
ments, C317, C387, C315, C343, L301, and CR303. Dial 135. 97MHz and adjust C314 to obtain
a VCO frequency of 126:975MHz. If erratic or erroneous operation is noted, check the frequency
determining components and verify that Q301 is saturated. If the VCO failes to operate, check
L301 and CR303 and Q302. Check the VCO for a proportional change in frequency with tuning
voltage changes on the low and high bands.
The VCO Low Pass Filter consisting of T307, T308, C348, C349, C350, C390, and C392 is an
elliptic low pass filter designed to recover D-C voltage from the output of the 25KHz Voltage
Translator. It has been factory adjusted and no attempt should be made to readjust in the field.
5. 5. 6.1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Using an oscilloscope, check for a square wave input
at TP302. Using a D-C voltmeter, check for a D-C voltage at TP301 (7.OOV DC at 126. 97MHz
to 2. 58V DC at 118.OOMHz). (See Figure 5-19)
The Voltage Translator consists of transistor Q317 which shifts the error voltage level from the
Phase and Frequency Comparator to a level sufficient to operate the VCO.
5. 5. 7. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Using an oscilloscope, trace the input signal from pins
4, 9, or 11 of 1311 to the output at TP302. See Figure 5-29 for typical D-C operating voltage
levels.
The Receiver Buffer consists of transistor Q303 with output transformer T301.
5. 5.8. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Using an oscilloscope, trace the input signal from
R309 to the output at TP303. See Figure 5-29 for typical D-C operating voltage levels.
The Transmit Buffer consists of Q306 with output transformer T305. It provides drive to the
transmitter only when both the TX Enable Switch, Q305, is turned off and the Out of Lock Disable
switch Q307 is saturated providing an emitter current path to ground.
The High Reference Oscillator consists of transistor Q3 11 operating in a typical Colpitts con-
figuration. Crystals Y30 1 and Y302 determine the operating frequency. In the low portion of
the COMM band (llS.OO-126.975MHz), Y301 is used on receive and Y302 is used on transmit.
In the high portion of the COMM band (127.00-135.975MHz), Y302 is on receive and Y301 on
transmit.
5. 5. 10. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. -Check the oscillator output at Pin 6 of T306. The
following table gives the desired functions under the various conditions encountered.
OSCILLATOR
CR313, CR322 Forward
TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE
Biased
l
Page 5-48 February, 1973
KlNG
KX 17OB/KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
Check supply and biasing voltages (See Figure 5-29 for typical D-C operating voltage levels).
The Implicit Divide by 2 circuit consists of balanced mixer CR305, CR306, CR307 and CR308
and amplifier Q3 10. For circuit theory refer to Section 4.2.
5. 5. 11. 1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Using an oscilloscope verify output from VCO Buffer
at Pin 6 of T302. Check for signal at the base of Q3 10 and track through the amplifier section
working toward TP304. See Figure 5-29 for typical D-C operating voltage levels. Refer to
5.4.12.1 and 5.4.13.1 for procedure for isolating amplifier and mixer failures.
This is a balanced mixer consisting of transformers T304 and T306 and diodes CR309, CR310,
CR311 and CR312.
5. 5.12.1 Troubleshooting Procedure. With the power removed from the KX 170B/KX 175B
using an ohmmeter check all diodes for a possible open. Check all transformer windings for
D-C continuity.
The Mixer Low Pass Filter is a basic pi-section low pass filter consisting of inductor L305 and
capacitors C375 and C376.
5. 5.13.1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Using an oscilloscope trace the signal from the output
of the Second Mixer (Pin 2 of T304) to the input of the Squaring Amplifier (base of Q312).
5. 5.14.1 Troubleshooting Procedure. Using an oscilloscope check for mixer output signal
at the base of Q312. Check TP306 for a 4 volt: square wave output. Check transistors Q312 and
Q313 and associated circuitry (See Figure 5-29 for typical D-C operating voltage levels).
Ql - - --
PIN 14
‘t?%i
(1206) Q2.
PIN I3
Q3
,PIN I2
KHz 1204
(PIN 8)
QO
PIN I5
QI
PIN I4
Q2
PIN I3
Q3
LPIN I2
PRESE;f”$ABLE
LOAD
(PIN6 1304) STATE
*
L - /
SELECTED FREQUENCY: NAV-ll6..700MHz
EXPANDED CORRESPONDING Dlvl DE RATIO- 127
SCALE
50KHz FLIP I
FLOP OUTPUT
0 (PIN7 1301) 0
: ‘I
I
PIN9 1309 I
0 8:;
,
I
; :
PING 1309 : I i ,i
0, I
I
I
PIN8 1303 ’
0 :
---- ---u-h
QI 1:
PINl40i j ul-ltl utl U-u-L-Inn uu~Lru-Ll-- -
-- - -Jj$-
KHz
I
u u II u u U U U II U uu
1 ( 2 j’
: I j ,:
,!il
,,,;y;‘,,)
CLOCK PULSE
- - - - - - - - - ll]l,,,,,l
- - - - - - - - - - - lllllll
50KHz FLIP I
FLOP OUTPUT
7J(PIN71301) 0) - - - - - - - -
,
PIN 9 1309
I
I
PIN 6 1309
0 j
PIN 8 1303 u
-------
I
KHz 1304
(PIN8) 0
’
u u u u I.; II u U U U U II u
-I-
I
Q3
i PIN I2 o I I I I I A--
PRESET ENABLE 1
OUT PUT SELECTED FREQUENCY! 126.70 OR 135.70 LOAD STATE
a304 PIN 6) o CORRESPONDING DIVIDE RATIO-- 127.5
\’ V J
FXPANDED
SCALE
COMM
200 KHz
PIN I 8 12
I
--- -- -
1310 0
+I6
NAV
1210
100 KHz
PIN 9
m------ m----- m-----
1 I -- ---
I ----
50 KHz
PIN 8
25 KHz I
PIN I I 0 ---J-
COUNTER OUTPUT
1204,1304 PIN 6
l
0 IIu uu II u u u
1212, 1312 I
PIN 0 0
I
1212,1312
PIN 6 0
1 I
12 I I, 131 I I
PIN 3 0 I I I
1211, 1311 I
PIN 6 0
I
12lI,13lI
PIN II 0 I1
PHASE ESTABLISHED TO GIVE PROPER VCO BIAS
-a.5v TO MAINTAIN PHASE LOCK iv- 8.5V-
VOLTAGE T,RANS -
LATOR OUTPUT
TP202, TP302
a THENAVRECEIVER
5.6 TROUBLESHOOTIN
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
The KX 170B/KX 175B NAV Receiver is identical to the KX 17OA/KX 175 NAV Receiver. See
Section 5.7 of the KX 175 Manual for troubleshootingprocedures.
5.7 TROUBLESHOOTIN
THE COW RECEIVER
The KX 170B/KX 175B COMM Receiver is identical to the KX 170A/ KX 175 COMM Receiver with
the exception of the First I. F. crystal filter and audio filter C513, C514, C515, and L415. See
Section 5.8 of the KX 175 Manual for troubleshooting procedures.
5.6 TROUBLESHOOTIN
THE AUDIOAMPLIFIER
The KX 170B/KX 175B audio amplifier is similar to the KX 170A/KX 175 audio amplifier with the
exception of the Intercom Mic input. See Section 5. 9 of the KX 175 Manual and figure 5-28 of the
KX 175B Manual for troubleshooting procedures.
5.9 TROUBLESHOOTIN
THE TRANSMITTER
The KX 170B/KX 175B Transmitter is identical to the KX 17OA/KX 175 Transmitter. See Section
5.10 of the KX 175 Manual for troubleshooting procedures.
5.10 TROUBLESHOOTIN
THE REGULATORS
5.10.1 COMM 8. 5 VOLT REGULATOR (Figure 5-30)
A complementary configuration using two transistors (Q102 and Q105) as a series pass element
was selected to enhance low supply voltage operation. Transistor Q104 provides negative feed-
back to the base of QlO5. Transistor Q107 and R134 provide short circuit protection for the
regulator.
If output is high (13. 75V), check for shorted transistor Q102, Q105 or an open connection to Q104.
The 8. 5V NAV regulator is a conventional series regulator consisting of a series control trans-
istor pair QlOl and Q103 and reference element CR102. Transistor QlOS and R128 provide short
circuit protection for the regulator.
5.10.2.1 Troubleshooting Procedure. If no output, check for 13. 75V input on yellow/white
wire. If 13. 75V is present, disconnect the grey (3 total) wires, and white (2) wires, and check
the collector of QlOl for 8. 5V. If this has corrected the problem, replace wires one at a time to
isolate the shorted assembly. Check the voltage at zener diode CR102 (approximately 9. 1V).
If output is high, check for shorted transistor QlOl or Q103 or open connection on zener CR102.
5.11 TROUBLESHOOTING
THE KA 39 VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
See Section 5.12 of KX 175 Manual
0
I
VARACTOR
FILTER - . RF AMP .
I
1
VARACTOR
FILTER
.
BALANCED
IST MIX
-
XTAL
FILTER . 2ndMIX
8 13675MHz
l
2 POLE
FILTER
c I. F AMP
(2 POLE1 (2 POLE) 9MHz 661 25KHz
t
T T
t 1
RECEIVER
DISABLE
R-F
LOW PASS I,
POWER AMP
SPEAKER
SIDETONE
REsisToR (OPTIONAL)
SPEAKER
AUDIO
AUDIO
OUTPUT -
NOISE LIMITER
AMPL.
*
XMIT KEY
c
HEADPHONE/ NOISE AMP
SIDETONE
AND FILTER
SOUELCH -
REGULATORS DISABLE
AUDIO AMP
0 FIGURE
MIKE INPUT
AUXILIARY
AUDIO
INPUTS
0
Page 6-l
Rev. 4, January, 1976
FINAL ASSEMBLY
uuu UU’lb: uo/
300-0661-00 007;-OO/iO78-00
KING RADIO CORF! PARTS LISTING QUANTITY
=
SYMBOL PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
-
200-0082-00 Rear-P1 Sub-Ass’y.
200-0449-00 Conn & CA Sub-Ass’y.
200-0449-01 Conn & CA Sub-Ass’y.
R4 200-0450-00 Front Pl Sub-Ass’y.
R4 200-0450-01 Front Pl Sub-Ass’y.
R4 200-0450-02 Front Pl Sub-Ass’y.
200-0451-00 SW Head Sub-Ass’y.
200-0451-01 SW Head Sub-Ass’y.
200-0452-00 NAV/ COMM Sub-Ass’y.
200-0452-01 NAV/COMM Sub-Ass’y.
200-0452-02 COMM BD. Sub-Ass’y.
200-0453-00 Rear Div Sub-Ass’y.
200-0453-01 Rear Div Sub-Ass’y.
200-0455-00 COMM SMO Sub-Ass’y.
200-0455-01 COMM SMO Sub-Ass’y.
200-0457-00 NAV SMO Sub-Ass’y.
200-0459-00 SW Matrix Ass’y.
1 [
9 --
E
4 I$ B \
089-5903-W(4)
I- 026~ooO5+3
(70 PINZI)
A
~&+600&03(Z) NO-E-5
/. RrF0?E/VCE B/M
2. OU/EN?- KHz GEAR
S/DE, TOP UP, SO T//AT
POS/T//oN ON PLATE PR/OR TO ASS&MBLY.
THE Mh’cs GEi4fi C+=?IVE OAJ /vAV. SIDE, A5 VIEWED FROM BACI: ‘SlDE,T~LIP,
SW-L BE AGAIAIST STOP AT MO51 CLOCKWISE POSITlOU. THE COMM
Mtk GEARS’ P05lTION UO-/- CRITIC4L.
MY-614 7-05(Z)
ms-5903-04
i( 059 - 6259-op ( 4)
ZM - 045/-00
A ,, 076~QiWFC’O (6)
/
047- Zi?93#/
09/-O//8-05 .
DETA/L %I*
--I&J-0457- a3
04/T-/73--o/
09/-O//8 -03 Q 1
OY7-2268-O/(Z).
DETA/L !J44*
\
0. 5ZwO RECE/YFL
//4&C T/O/V ACCESS
04’72269-O/ (2)$
09/ -O//B -04 (2)
089-5903-W(4)
1,‘\
\ ix
‘, l
1 ‘\
057-/537 -01
KYl95BE ONLY .
zoo -oiwz-00
006 -0005-03
/50-0020-/O
089-6&%03(Z) NO-I-E5
/. RFF&UENCE L$& 569 -/GE’/ -00 (KY/95B)
2. omwr KHr Gm? ~7mc.s~o~ FACE PLATE .~SSY AS V/EWEL~ FUOM BALK
SIDE, TOP UP, 50 V/MT HOAS’ /N GFARS /d//V THE /Z 85 O’CLOCK
POS/T/ON ON PLATE PRIOR TO ASSEMBLY.
MHt GEARS’ POS/T/ON NOT CRITICAL.
01/7-2267-02
m9-5903~oq
099 - 6ZB-of ( 4)
I I
I
1
A
m //-ass - 2@5-22 (4)
I’
. za6 -045/-o/
quououuuuuo Q+ uuuuuuuuuu
q
6 4
047-/943-00
OSS-59A?dp’
008-0005-03 Lug 1 1
008-0040-00 Lug Solder 1
016-1008-04 Glyptal Blue AF
016-1016-00 Lubricant AF
016-1033-00 ADH Activator AF
016-1034-00 Adhesive AF
026-0001-00 #26 Buss Wire .4
R4 026-0005-00 #18 Buss Wire 1
R4 029-0096-01 Gear Drive MHz 1
R4 029-0096-02 Gear Drive MHz 1 2
R4 029-0097-01 Gear Drive KHz 2 2
047-1672-00 Spring Detent 2 2
047-1713-00 Spring SW Detent 2 2
R4 047-2214-01 Stop Arm 1.
-
R4 047-2613-00 Insr Fr Pnl Comm 1 1
R4 047-2630-00 Insr Fr Pnl NAV 1
R4 047-2631-00 Insr Fr Pnl Comm A 1
047-2632-00 Insr Fr Pnl Comm B 1
R4 047-2634-00 Insr Fr Pnl NAV 1
R4 047-2638-01 Clamp Hold Down 8 8 6
057-1369-00 Logo 1 1
057-1415-00 Logo Tag Blk
R4 073-0053-00 Knob KHz 2
073-0085-00 Knob Mode Vol 1
R4 073-0123-01 Knob MHg 2
R4 073-0195-04 Pnl Fr Xcur
R4 073-0195-05 Pnl Fr
078-0024-00 Spring Cprsn 1 1
088-0125-00 Hold Down Unit 1 1
088-0141-00 Lever SW 2 2
088-0326-01 Lens 2 2
089-2106-30 Hex Nut l/4-32 2 2
R4 089-5569-03 #2-56 THP 8 8
089-5874-03 Scr 2-56 x 3/16PHP 1 1
089-5899-02 Scr 2-56 x 1/8PHP 4 4 I 1
089-6218-04 Sscr #4-40 4 2
089-6222-04 Sscr #6-32 8 8
089-8023-30 Washer Flat 4 6
089-8042-30 l/4” Int T Lk Wash 2 1
089-8184-00 Wash Spacer 1 1
L A -
300-0648-00
SUB-ASS’Y.
[ UNIT j1%3J”&Q75z[~~ED
KING RADIO CORI? PARTS LISTING
200-0450-00102
0~
II
1
=
QUANTITY
= =
SYMBOL 1 PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION IO ET -
090-0019-01 3 Rtng 318 z z- T
090-0041-01 3 Rtng l/4 2 2 2
R4 090-0052-00 3011 Pin 1 1 1
092-0026-00 jcr Hold Down 1 1 1
150-0003-10 /24 Tef Tubing 4 4 0t
150-0004-10 f22 Tef Tubing 1 1
150-0006-10 f18 Tef Tubing 1 1 OE
150-0020-10 jhrink Tubing 1 1 1
- -
Rev. 4, January, 1976 Page 6-3
Parts List Revisions Record
l
KING
la 170B/Kx 175x3
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER 089-5569-03(2)
-089-8023-30(2l
029-0097-03
/
091-0018-02 (2)
--., “., \
J
‘it. ” ‘, 047-2360-o I (KY 19iB)
&I!:.:..., NOTE 5
08%5569-03(5)
,4,,,,‘,, f&i,,
090-0019-Ol(2)
NOTES:
I RIOI AND ITS RELATED HARDWARE ARE NOT ON KY 195.
4.
5. -089-6222-04(e)
6.
089-6218 -04(4)
(KY 1958 (2)
/1‘,? //
[ol\ \
r-
Page 6-9A SHT-OF-1 Rev.4 January 1976
K-1651
NAME ASS’Y. NO.
Front Plate Sub-Assembly 200-1786-c )0/01/02
-
a
KING RADIO CORP. PARTS LISTING l!lT -
0
-
Q \Nl
-
‘Y
-
I SYMBOL T, PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 0 -00 -01 -02 -03
- = - - =
K-1650 3/73
KING
KX 170B/KX 175B
NAVIGATI ON RECEIVER/COMMUNICATI3NSTRANSCEIVER
/029-0097-03 029-0097-03
,091-0018-02 (2)
,i m
- 031-0264-00
047-1713-OO(2)
000-05~2-00
047-2342-o ‘I (KX 1758)
----- 047-2350-0 I (KX 170B)
047-2360 -0 I (KY 1958)
090-0052-02’ w/-A \
SEE NOTE 6
NOTE 5
000-0125-00
078-0024-00
(Rl02)
047-3567-00 (4) 1
\ 57-1415-00 (KX-170B)
l
031-0264-00 \
(slog)
090-0019-Ol(2)
NOTES’
I RIOI AND ITS RELATED HARDWARE ARE NOT ON KY 195.
‘\ 089-8042 -3Oi2) , ‘r-7-
/ (KY 1958 (1)
2 ALL SCREWS AND NUTS NOT SECURED BY LOCKWASHER SHALL BE
LIQUID STAKED USING BLUE GLYPTAL. tOI&1008-04) 8 ,089-2106’-30(2)
b
(KY 1958(l)
3. TOROUE REQUIREMENTS AFTER SHAFTS AND DETENTS HAVE BEEN /’ A+@-1
PROPERLY ASSEMBLED AND LUBRICATED, ROTATE EACH SHAFT .073-0005-00~2)
SEVERAL REVOLUTIONS. THEN MEASURE TORQUE. .047-1706-01 (KX I70B/KX 1758)
TORQUE RANGE: 22-30 IN;OZ. \
/” 047-2361-00 (KYl95B) NOTE 5 073-Ol23-03(2)
4 APPLY A LIMITED AMOUNT OF LUBRICANT(016-1016-00)
WHERE NOTED.
5 ACTIVATE ADHESIVE BACK OF INKRTS WITH 016-1033-00 6222-04(a)
TRICHLOROETHYLENE ACTIVATOR I-K. ,088-C326-01 (21
6. CENTER ROLL PIN ON SCREW WITHIN f.016. ^^^ ^^
‘oes-6218 -04(4)
(KY 1958 (2)
t 1
THIS FACE PLATE ASSEMBLY IS FOR:
I S/N 35001 & Above KX 170B
S/N 35001 & Above KX 175B
I
047.1708.OO(21
S/N 5701 & Above KY 195B FACE PLATE ASSEMBLY MAY BE ORDERED UNDER ONE OF
THE FOLLOWING NUMBERS:
KX 175B -2oo- ,I’786 -00
KX 17OB- 200- I 786-01
KY 195B- 200- I 786- 02
FIGURE 6-3B FRONT PLATE ASSEMBLY
(Dwg. No. 300-1786-00, R-3; Sht 1)
Rev. 4, January, 1976 Page 6-9D
KlNG
KX 17OB/kX 1758
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/COMMUNCIATIONSTRANSCEIVER
KY 195B
ii9 I lo20I
-I
KING RADIO CORF? PARTS LISTING C IANTITY
=
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION FiTiz -
200 -0 57c-04 Gear Face NAV-COMM 7 2
R4 QlOl 007-O 184-O 1 Tstr TA7557& o/41 **O 1
R4 Q102 007-O 184-O 1 Tstr TA7557qo(qr. 00 1 1
Q103 007-0039-01 Tstr 2N3404 1
Q104 007 -0078 -00 Tstr 2N34 15 1 1
Q105 007-0039-01 Tstr 2N3404 1 1
QlOS 007-0078 -00 Tstr 2N34 15 1
Q107 007-0078-00 Tstr 2N34 15 1 1
0
NAME ASS’Y. NO. 1 1
SWITCH WAFER ASSEMBLIES ZOO-0575 0105
KING RADIO CORP. PARTS LISTING QUANTITY
- -
1
?
m-,
T PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 1
I
-02
-
-03
-
-04
200-0575-00 Switch Ass'y COMMS103
-I=I
200-0575-01 Switch Ass'y NAV 5105
200-0575-02 Switch Ass'y NAV S106 X
200-0575-03 Switch Ass'y NAV S108 X
200-0575-04 Switch Ass'y COMMS102 X I
(KX 170A/175/KY195 Only) I
200-0575-05 Switch Ass'y COMMS103/1 1 x
(KY195B)
I
150-0003-10 Tubing, Teflon #24ga .2 - i .l
150-0004-10 Tubing, Teflon #22ga .l
I
l ? Rev.
K-1651
4, January, 1976 SHTLOFL Page 6-14A
i
i
r
NSS Y. DWG.
076-0298-O i -.,
(2)
?50- 0003 L0
f? ?c-c~% 1
026-OOOI-00
(6 T=bcra)
Og3-2140-00‘ (2’1
047-2bZ
ooe- 0005-03
(2)
/’ ,
,_.’/
_/” ,/’
./’ /’
_’
,/’
A””
,A’
~047-1675-01
008-000503 r 150-co20 - 10
/
,.I’
__,”
A’ / x\ ,,I
\‘-069-2140-00 C2)
7, /
KX 170B/KX 175B
FIGURE 6-4 SWITCHING HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY
(Dwg. No. 300-0650-00 R-lO)(Sht. 1 of 2)
Rev. 4, January, 1976 Page 6-15
PI34 PIGI
5105 5106
230-0375.01
/9
WIRING CHART 1
To NAV. SMO
300-O&58-00
BUNDLE A
IO
f0 ! A--+--: /I
To Corm .Sr?o
300-0656-
1. UNLFSS NO7tYD-
+*zLAWG COPPERW&LO-025-OOB-XX
#Z&citiG BUSS - 026-ooo\- 00
2 _ SLEEVf W/TH /5-O-0003-/0.
3. ST/?/P #TIM . PO FROM ENO, ALL W/RES.
R\3
04-(-Z&,24- O-Z ~- --
--OS+8\00-30
ceo-oom- 0 I
/
.A
/ /’
,.,’ _, ..
./- /
/’ ._
I / /
A’ / ’
,.’ 047-1675-O\
,/” ‘_ /
/ --L A’ ‘\003-2l40-OO(2)
/ ,’
.,. /’
..’ 016-0290-03t2~~
,. -200-0576-04
_/ ‘lx_
\ ‘,\ m ~Po\o&oool-ol _ o1
047-2620&~
‘_.. r=+l
oe9 -zag 31(2)7\
...
.. 080 - 0232-o\\ -1 ‘\
..__
SEE VIEW Q-Lh \ ..x.
‘sxY?eoZFW
7
’ .Y__ AWL--I \50-COZO-IO To 00%0~05-03 (5 Pa-&~
‘.. .‘-OSI-0\04-00(5\02)
2..
.:’ ‘-076-0230-O\~‘L)
047-2635-00
-008-b ~os-o3(2J
090-0160-00
088-0321-03 A
-oe9-aloo-
090-0019-o I
04-I-2625-04 A
1’
’ ;-G,“~~o-::,‘,“,;“:,., 3 ONE
MUST
TOOTU
POINT
OF 3 TOOTH GCAR-
TOWARD CENTER
“-- -*ATE WLTH 0\6-1016-00 VIEW A-A
AXIS OF TRAN3FEn PLATE,041-2G7.5.Ol
,76-00 a ^. ___e
KY 1958
FIGURE 6-5 SWITCHING HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY
(Dwg. No. 300-0651-OO)(Sht. 1 of 2) R-6
Rev. 4, January, 1976 Page 6-19
,- PLOT NEL/W!-lT)
,- P\\I(GRY)
LENGT U
P245
PI06 (Si02j iPI (SIO3) ” RI-l55 PI.51
PIII (5\03) P192. (5106) /GREY P265
Pll6(SlO3) ‘Pi91 (5106) ‘BROWN Pl0-L ” P266
PI66 (5104) .P17o~Il3(slos~ cuss P269
p 1104 173(5105) P 185 (SLO6) e.USS P261
P 193 (SIOL) P szl(UOTE3) ‘REO/BLU P1O-l (5102) P260
P 195 (5106) P 179cNOTE4) j DLACK P\Oe. (S\O3) P241
PI09 ” P253 5101,102, I93
PI14 11 P260
L._AMP WtU\NG CUART PI20 ” P263
FROM TO PEM*RKs PI21 ‘1 P262
05 \OI [WIG) i P 124 (5\03) : 5==E SUEET 1 PI22 ” P261
DS\Ol (SLY) PI\7 (5102) : ” ” PI2;(5\03) I=‘255
D5lOZ(Wc\T) / PII7 (5\02\) / ) ‘I 8’ P \a3 (5iO4) P250
PIG.9 cs104\ P250
PI71 ISIO5) P289 ~WITCHlbG AEAt 14
No-resi PI12 ” P288 BUNDLE A=sY.
,. UNLESS NOTED: PlS2 81 P287 sue- AS'3Y.
ALL WIRE ‘ZG. AwG.COPPERWELD PI83 ” PtS6 300-O&5\-01
025-oo,e- sx, ccxoq PER CUARTS. PI 84 (5\05) P285 330-C&5\-00
BUSS WIRE, l 2GAWG. 026.OOO\-00 PI86 (5\06) PZBC
AND SLhEVED WITH I50-0003-\a PI87 @I P261
P\88 I’ P282
2. STR\P.f TIN .20 FROM =hlD, ALLWLRES
pfa5 ~5106~ P283 -
3. TO FRONT PLATE ASSY., 300-0648-00
4. SEE SUEET I FOR CONNECT\ONS.
-
C231 113-3100-00 Cap DC 1Opf N150 1
C232 113-3270-00 Cap DC 27pf N150 1
C233 113-3100-00 Cap DC 10pf N150 1
C234 114-5152-00 Cap DC 1500pf 10% 1
C235 113-3470-00 Cap DC 47pf 5% 1
(‘236 113-3820-00 Cap DC 82pf 5% 1
C237 i14-5152-00 Cap DC 1500pf 10% 1
C238 114-5152-00 Cap DC 1500pf 10% 1
c-239 113-5151-01 Cap DC 150pf 10% 1
C240 113-5151-01 Cap DC 150pf 10% 1
C241 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lpf 12V 1
C242 113-5681-00 Cap DC 680pf 10% 1
C243 114-7104-00 Cap DC lpf 12V 1
C244 096-1030-22 Cap Tant 22pf 1OV 1
C245 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lj!f 12V 1
C246 096-1030-22 Cap Tant 22pf 1OV 1
C247 114-7104-00 Cap DC , lpf 12V 1
C248 096-1030-22 Cap Tant 22pf 1OV 1
C252 106-0034-00 Cap FT 1. 5Kpf 20% 1
C253 106-0034-00 Cap FT 1. 5Kpf 20% 1
C254 106-0034-00 Cap FT 1. 5Kpf 20% 1
C255 106-0034-00 Cap FT 1, ,5Kpf 20% 1
C256 106-0034-00 Cap FT 1. 5Kpf 20% 1
C257 106-0034-00 Cap FT 1. 5Kpf 20% 1
C258 106-0034-00 Cap FT 1. 5Kpf 20% 1
c259 106-0034-00 Cap FT 1. 5Kpf 20% 1
C260 106-0034-00 Cap FT 1. 5Kpf 20% 1
C261 106-0034-00 Cap FT 1. 5Kpf 20% 1
C262 106-0034-00 Cap FT 1. 5 Kpf 20% 1
C264 114-7104-00 Cap DC . ll.tf 12V 1
C265 096-1030-22 Cap Tant 22pf 1OV 1
C266 113-5681-00 Cap DC 680pf 10% 1
C267 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lpf 121’ 1
C268 113-5471-00 Cap DC 470pf 10% 1
C270 106-0034-00 Cap FT 1. 5Kpf 20% 1
C271 113-7503-00 Cap DC , 05pf 12V 1
11 200-0457-00
Page F-
Parts List Revisions Record
a
NAV SMO SUB-ASS’Y. 200-0457-00
069-1019-00
SS'V. DWd300-0658-00 069-1020-00
KING RADIO CORf? PARTS LISTING QUANTITY
SYMBOL PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION1
00 =
016-1011-00
047-2230-02
Pliobond
Tray NAV SMO
ri
1
- -
076-0165-09 Spacer 1
076-0339-00 Spacer 1
07'6-0343-00 Spacer 1
089-5874-03 SCR 2-56 x 3116 PHP 4
089-5878-05 SCR 4-40 x 5/16 PHP 2
091-0088-01 Insulation NAV SMO’ 1
200-0458-00. NAV SMO Sub-Ass’y. 1
m
-
076- 0343-00 nh
\ \ 076-0165-09
089-5874-03(4)
076-O 1339-00
200-0458-00
REF:
\089-5878-05(2)
-
C566 096-1030-22 Cap, Tant 22pf 1OV 1
R4 i C567 114-7104-00 Cap, DC 1Kpf 12V 1 1
R4 1 C568 114-7104-00 C‘ap, DC 1Kpf 12V 1
R4 C569 114-7104-00 Cap, DC 1Kpf 12V 1
a
Assembly No. 200-0456-OO/Ol (B/MRL Rev. 12 ) Manual Revision No. 4
016-1011-00 Pliobond LR 11
047-1736-02 Tray Comm SMO 1 1
076-0165-09 Spacer 1 1
076-0343-00 Spacer 1 1
089-5874-03 3cr 2-56 x 3116 PHP 6 6
089-5878-05 kr 4-40 x 5/16 PHP 1 1
091-0087-00 hsulation Comm SMO 1 1
200-0456-00 Comm SMO Sub-Assly 1
200-0456-01 Comm SMO Sub-Assly 1
‘\.
I
I
Assembly No. 200-0455-OO/Ol Manual Revision No. 0
__
u
Page 6-40 February, 1973
KlNG
Io( l?OB/KX 175B
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
076-0165-09
076-0343-00 \
089-
\ 047- 1736-02
091-0087-00
BOND IN PLACE
WITH 016-1011-00
089-5878-05
REF : B/M 200-0455-OO/Ol
- - - - - -
l-
1 Paoe 6-42 SHT-OF-1 Rev. 4, January, 1976
K-1651
200-0452-00105
Page
i7417
6-44
113-5101-01 Cap DC 1OOpf X5F
Rev.
1
4,
1
January, 1976
l
‘069: 1019/1020/
L- 102 l-00
KING RADIO CORF! PARTS LISTING
=
c IANTITY
SYMBOL PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 1 10 E
C418 106-0001-18 CapMld . 82pf 50/o T 7
c419 106-0001-34 CapMld 6. 8pf 5% 1 1
C420 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lpf 12V 1 1
C421 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lpf 12V 1 1
C422 113-7203-00 Cap DC. 02pf 12V 1 1
C424 106-0001-34 Cap Mld 6. 8pf 5% 1 1
C425 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lpf 12V 1 1
C426 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lpf 12V 1 1
C428 106-0001-34 Cap Mld 6. 8pf 5% 1 1
c429 114-7104-00 Cap DC . ll.tf 12V 1 1
c435 096-1030-24 Cap Tant 68pf 1OV 1 1
C436 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lpf 12V 1 1
c437 105-0031-08 Cap Myl. . 0022pf 80V 1 1
C438 113-7503-00 Cap DC . 05pf 12V 1 1
C4 3 9 097-0062-02 Cap Elec , 22pf 25V 1 1
c440 097-0062-06 Cap Elec l/*f 25V 1 1
C44 1 096-1030-25 Cap Tant 150pf 1OV 1 1
C442 096-1030-25 Cap Tant 150pf 1OV 1 1
c44 3 096-1030-08 Cap Tant 100pf 15V 1 1
c444 113-7503-00 Cap DC , 05pf 12V 1 1
C446 113-7503-00 Cap DC . 05pf 12V 1 1
c447 113-5181-00 Cap DC 180pf X5F 1 1
C448 113-3330-00 Cap DC 33pf N150 1 1
c-449 113-7503-00 Cap DC . 05pf 12V 1 1
c450 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lpf 12V 1 1
c451 114-7104-00 Cap DC . ll.tf 12V 1 1
C452 096-1030-24 Cap Tant 68pf 1OV 1 1
c453 096-1030-17 Cap Tant 6. 8pf 15V 1 1
R4 C454 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lpf 12V 1 1
R4 c455 105-0031-47 Cap My1 . 0271.tf 8OV 1 1
C456 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lpf 12V 1 1
c457 096-1030-03 Cap Tant 2. 2pf 15V 1 1
C458 113-7503-00 Cap DC . 05pf 12V 1 1
c459 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lpf 12V 1 1
C460 113-5331-00 Cap DC 330pf X5F 1 1 1
C461 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lpf 12V 1 1 1
C462 114-7104-00 Cap DC . lyf 12V 1 1 1
C463 1133270 -00 Cap DC 27pf N150 1 1 1
C464 096-1030-17 Cap Tant 6. 8yf 15V 1 1 1
C465 097-0062-06 Cap Elec lpf 25V 1 1 1
C466 097-0062-06 Cap Elec l/*f 25V 1 1 1
C467 113-3039-00 Cap DC 3. 9pf N150 1 1 1
c‘468 113-3820-00 Cap DC 82pf X5F 1 1 1
C469 113-3047-00 Cap DC 4.7pf N150 1 1 1
.-
l
February, 1973 Page 6-53
NAME I
ON
KING RADIO CORF! PARTS LISTING QUANTITY
=
SYMBOL 1 PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
-
008 -0042 -00 Lug, Solder 1
008 -0044-O 1 Term. Gnd Stud 1
010-0019-90 Term. Standoff 2
0 10 -0029 -90 Term. Feedthru 1
0 16 - 1004-00 Thermal Comp AF
026-0003-00 #22 Wire 1
047-1833-01 Cover Conn 1
073 -0093 -02 Rear Plate 1
076-0139-09 Spat er 1
076 -0 164-06 Spacer 3
089-2005-3’7 Nut Hex #2-56 1
089-2272-30 Nut #8 -32 2
089-5874-03 Ser. 2-56X3 /lS PHP 3
089-5878-04 Ser. 4-40X1 /4 PHP 2
089-8012-37 Washer #2 1
090-0133-00 Heat Sink 1
09 l-0028 -00 Ser. Nyl 4-40X3 / 16 1
09 1-o 155-00 Washer, Mica 1
200-0083-00 Trans. Bd. Sub-Ass’y. 1
CR604
-
.603
<
?706 -
t631
C623(
T604 ‘-..
.b.
.M 9 TO
ITEM9 I:. 2(3
‘0 ) 0602
NOTES:
I. BALLOON NO’s REFER TO ITEM No’s ON B/M 200-0082-00.
,.“P” NO’s ARE FOR REF. TO POINT TO POINT WIRING CONN.
/A 3. TORQUE REQUIREMENTS- go-looiN. oz. (ITEM 2 8 3).
February, 1973
Parts List Revisions Record
a
KING RADIO CORF? PARTS LISTING IANTITY
= =
SYMBOL PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION oc
008-0004-00 Lug 2
R4 008-0005-01 Lug 3
008-0040-00 Lug 1
009-0003-08 Tml Strip 2
009-0030-00 Tml Strip 1
009-0030-01 Tml Strip 1
016-1004-00 T hrm Compound LR
016-1034-00 Adhesive LR
025-0003-02 Wire #22 Red . :
025-0003-03 Wire #22 Om . c
025-0018-29 Wire #26 Red / Wht . t
025-0018-33 Wire #26 Orn . f
025-0018-69 Wire #26 Blu/ Wht .E
025-0018-79 Wire #26 Viol Wht . E
025-0018-98 Wire #26 Wht/Gry . :
025-0018-99 Wire #26 Wht . :
026-0001-00 Wire #26 BUSS . s
047-1733-02 Divider Rear 1
047-2110-01 Bracket Tstr 1
076-0165-04 Spacer 4
089-2007-37 Nut 3-48 1
089-2076-30 Nut Hex 4-40 S. S. 7
089-2140-00 #4 Esna Nut 4
089-2144-30 Nut Hex 2-56 S. S. 2
089-2147-22 #6 Esna Nut 2
089-5878-04 Scr 4-40 x l/4 4
089-5903-04 Scr 4-40 x l/4 3
089-5903-05 Scr 4-40 S. S. PHP 4
089-5907-05 Scr 6-32 x 5116, 2
089-8001-34 Washer S/L #2 2
089-8003-34 Washer S/L #4 7
089-8013-37 Washer Int T #3 1
089-8025-30 Washer Flat #4 4
091-0068-04 Shld Phenolic 4
150-0003-10 #24 Tef Tubing 2
R4 150-0005-10 #20 Tef Tubing 2
R4 150-0020-10 Shrink Tubing 3
187-1029-00 Channel Rubber 13
200-0454-00 Audio Dr. Bd. Sub Ass’y 1
I 1
Page 6-60 Rev. 4, January, 1976
KING RADIO CORP PARTS LISTING QUANTITY
= = =
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION F Fl
- - -
Q703 007-0065-00 Tstr 2N3906 1 1
Q704 007-0065 -00 Tstr 2N3906 1 1
Q705 007-0197-00 Tstr 40633 1 1
8706 007-0197-00 Tstr 40633 1 1
SAME AS P642
089-2140-00
SAME AS P641
089-2076-30
026-0001-00
150-0003-10
009-0030-00
rrma,
089-8025-30 (4) ,Ippllp<Ito Cdlh ,ldP.Of “II?* t”s”lat”r 130-0332- 25
091-0068-04 (4)
NOTES:
I.“P” NUMBERS ARE FOR REF. TO POINT TO POINT
WIRING CONNECTIONS.
007-0197-00
---‘-019-5062-00
(T 702) 150-0020-10
089-5903-05
(4)
\089-2147-22
(2)
KY 1958
COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSCEIVER
INSTALLATION
MANUAL
006-0088-01
s
I REV. 1 JANUARY, 1976
THIS EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED UNDER
THE FOLLOWING U. S. PATENT 3,696,422
KY 195B
KlNG
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
SECTION
I GENERAL
INFORMATION
1. 1 Introduction l-l
1. 2 Purpose of Equipment l-l
1. 3 Design Features l-l
1.4 Power Requirements l-2
1. 5 Technical Characteristics l-2
1. 6 Units and Accessories Supplied l-4
1. 7 Accessories Required but not Supplied l-4
1.8 License Requirements l-5
SECTION
II INSTALLATION
2.1 General 2-l
2. 2 Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment 2-l
2.3 KY 195B Installation 2-l
2.4 KA 39 Installation 2-2
2; 5 Antenna Installation 2-2 *
2.6 Cabling Installation 2-2
SECTION
Ill OPERATION
3.1 General 3-l
3.2 KY 195B Comm Controls 3-l
3.3 Post-Installation Checkout 3-2
--
KlNG-
KY 195B
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
HISTORYOF REVISIONS
2-9 Added
ii
KY’195B
KlNG
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
SECTION
I
&NERALINFORMATION
1.1 INTRODUCTION
. This manual contains information relative to the physical, mechanical and electrical character-
istics of the King Radio Corporation Silver Crown KY 195B.
The King KY 195B COMM combines in a single panel mounted unit a 720 channel VHF COMM
Transceiver with dual, independent, frequency selectors.
1.3 DESIGNFEATURES
A. Controls
1. Varactor diode tuned filters eliminates use of mechanical tuning shafts and
mechanisms.
4. The digital frequency synthesizer utilizes state of the art integrated circuits
to replace all but 4 crystals.
7. Tight AGC (typically 0. 5db from 10~~ to 20,000~~) minimizes audio level
variations.
Page l-l
KY 195B
KlNG
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
C. Construction
1.4 POWERREQUIREMENTS
The KY 195B requires 13.75 volts for proper operation. Aircraft having electrical power plants
producing 27.5 volts require the installation of a voltage converter. The KA 39 Voltage
Converter, designed to convert 27.5 volts to 13. 75 volts, may be conveniently remote mounted
in the aircraft.
1.5 TECHNICAL
CHARACTERISTICS
CDTJ,-‘TTZ’TP
UI YVIK LULL
A ‘PTT\T,l
I I”J.1
~~ T PUAR
V~~L..A.“LIV
ACTF’RTSTTC
A LILUIVA AV
1 KY 195B TRANSCEIVER(
1
TSO COMPLIANCE:
Environmental DAPBAAXXXXXX
Page l-2
KlNG
KY 195B
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
(RECEIVER]
[AUDIO [
AUXILIARY AUDIO INPUTS: Two (2) 500 ohms with 30db isolation between
any two.
Page 1-3
KING
KY 195B
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
SP??C:IATION CHARACTERISTIC
A B
POWER: Input Volts ’ 27. 5vdc 27. 5vdc
output Volts 13. 75vdc 13.75vdc
(nominal) (nominal)
1.7 ACCESSORIES
REQUIRED,BUT NOTSUPPLIED
Page l-4
KlNG
KY 195B
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
1.8 LICENSEREQUIREMENTS
The Federal Communications Commission requires that the operator of the transmitter of this
equipment hold a Restricted Radio Telephone Operator Permit, or higher class license. A
permit may be obtained by an U. S. citizen from the nearest field office of the FCC; no exami-
nation is required.
This equipment has been type accepted by the FCC and entered on their list of type accepted
equipments as King KY 195B and must be identified as King KY 195B.
-CAUTION -
Page l-5
KlNG
KY 195B
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
SECTION
II
INSTALLATION
2.1 GENERAL
This section contains suggestions and factors to consider before installing the KY 195B COMM
unit and KA 39 Voltage Converter (27. 5V installations only). Close adherence to these suggest-
ions will assure a more satisfactory performance from the equipment.
Exercise extreme care when unpacking each unit. Make a visual inspection of each unit for
evidence of damage incurred during shipment. If a claim for damage is to be made, save the
shipping container to substantiate the claim. When all equipment is removed, place in the
shipping container all packing materials for use in unit storage or reshipment. The KY 195B
installation will conform to standards designated by the customer, installing agency and existing
conditions as to unit location and type of installation.
(a) The KY 195B is mounted rigid in the aircraft panel. Mark and cut the mounting hole
as shown in Figure 2-4. The purpose of the “behind aircraft panel mount cutout is
to allow a margin of error in cutout size and prevent the mounting tray front edge
from being visible. The mounting tray bottom lip should extend through the mounting
hole flush with the instrument panel to insure proper plug pin engagement.
(b) Avoid mounting close to any high external heat source. If this is done, no blower or
ram air cooling will be required. For Blower or Ram Air cooling. see Figures 2-6
and 2-7.
(c) Remember to allow adequate space for installation of cables and connectors.
(4 Secure the mounting rack to instrument panel per Figure 2-4. The rear mounting
bosses should be attached to the airframe by means of support brackets.
(4 Slide the KY 195B into the rack and secure by turning locking screw on the front
panel.
-CAUTlON-
(f) An antitheft mechanism is available for the KY 195B (KPN 050 - 1326 -00 short locking
bar, 050-1326-01, long locking bar). This kit may be installed at the customers option
to provide a means of locking the radio to the instrument panel with a padlock located
on the lower rear corner of the mounting tray.
Installation consists of riveting the bracket to the mounting tray as shown in Figure 2-4.
After the radio installation is complete, the locking bar may be inserted and a small
padlock affixed to deter theft.
(a) Select the KA 39 location considering good thermal conductivity to the air-
frame, convenient cable routing, proximity to the KY 195B and separation
from other heat sources.
(d) The installing agency will supply and fabricate external cables
2.5 ANTENNAINSTALLATION
(a) A conventional 50 ohm vertically polarized COMM antenna is required with
the KY 195B. Vertical bent whip antennas are not recommended Wideband
COMM antennas provide efficient operation over the COMM band Antennas
should be installed per manufacturers recommendations. Additional rec-
ommendations are as follows
2. The antenna should be well removed from any projections including the
engine(s) and propeller.
3. The COMM Antenna should be well separated from any NAV Antenna to
minimize COMM interference to NAV while transmitting (30db min. ).
(b) Refer to Figure 2-2 for the COMM antenna cable connector assembly.
Solder tack the snap on shield to the connector base at two points to insure
that a good electrical ground is made.
2.6 CABLING
(a) The length and routing of the external cables must be carefully studied and
planned prior to installation. Avoid sharp bends and placing cables too
near the aircraft control cables.
-NOTE-
Use good quality stranded wire that will not support
a flame and with at least 600 volts insulation. It is
recommended that the mike audio line be in a shield-
ed-twisted pair.
(4 Since other radio equipment will possibly utilize the same speaker circuits
for muting, speaker selection and microphone switching must be devised
by the installing agency.
Page 2-2
KlNG
KY 195B
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
/-SOLDER
.093R 2 PLCS.
NOTES:
I. ALL DIMENSIONS IN PARENTHESIS ARE IN CENTIMETERS.
ZWEIGHT: 1.1 Ibe
3 TERMINALS WILL TAKE 16TOZZAWG WIRE.
4TERMlNALS ARE ff5-40YIA ED. HO. SCREWS.
WARNING
-
I- 5.500
(13.870) -I DONOT MOUNT IN CLOSE PROXIMITY
TO HEATER DUCT OR OTHER SOVRCES OF HEAT I
155-5076-00 (R- )
-
-4
0
Pf
Page 2-5
KING
KY 195B
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
r7 030-2101-04
-P171
33
38
20
-2
-
-INST
-A/C
-SPARE
IMT LIGHT
LIGHT
DI!dXER ~
DIMMER -A
POWER-#16Ah'G---
5A
13.75VDC
-A/C
DIMMER CONTROL
POWER 13.75VDC
I 12
INST LIGHT DIFDlER-NC
3
B
13
14
1
INST
A/C
COtm
LIGHT
SWITCHED
DIMMER-27.5VDC
FOWER--P16AWG-~-27.5VDC
A/C ROWER-#L6AWG
OllTPII'I
DIMMER CONTROL
A/C POWER
INPLlT
\
19
2
22
5
COMM 13.75VDC
(1.5A
(5.OA
CONTINUOUS)
INPUT-#16Ah'G
- PILOT MIKE
37 INTER COM MIKE
AUDIO
PILOT TX
PCT L -COPILOT MIKE
INTERC.
COPILOT
.
TX. ‘0 0
FIGURE 2-5 KY 195 INTERCONNECT
(DWG. NO. 155-1099-00 R-3)
-=-.-P_ 2 -5 __-_- Rev. 1,’ January, 1976
- ----\
COMMUNICATIONS
KB TRANSCEIX’ER
NOTE 2
NOTES:
t -I
.750
,126 DIA. H
4 PLCS
R4RT B
3.000 ____--_----- 5.000 I _--- -----
-- t
I
c + .750
4
.62 5 -+- __----- ----
---------- _____ -- ------~~ 1
0
-klEND -bEND UP TO MAKE
END.
,093 DIA. HOLE, 2 PLCS
PART C MOUNTING
INSTALLER.
OF UNIT OPTIONAL TO
, PANEL
KT 76 /78
KX 1758 (I-REQD. )
HOLE
KX 1758
VIEW B
LDUCT. TUBING TO
KAIB’RAM AIR KIT KUiJ
(150-0083-00)
i
KING.
KY 195B
COMMUNICATIONSTRANSCEIVER
SECTION
III
OPERATION
3.1 GENERAL
All controls required ‘to operate the KY 195B are located on the unit front panel.
The ON-OFF-TEST control is located directly above the COMM A channel selector. Power is
supplied to the COMM when this control is either in the ON or TEST position. The TEST position
is used to defeat the COMM automatic squelch for both test purposes and listening to extremely
weak signals.
The Volume (VOL) control, located on the lower left side of the KY 195B is used to adjust the
transceiver audio volume. The KY 195B system power ON/OFF switch is independent of this
control, allowing the COMM volume to remain at a desired preset level.
The two concentric knobs under the COMM A frequency window are used to dial COMM A
frequencies. The larger knob selects MHz and the smaller knob selects KHz. The transceiver
is inoperable in the two unused MHz positions between 118MHz and 135MHz. Clockwise rotation
selects higher frequencies. The dial mechanism has no stops, permitting continuous rotation.
The two concentric knobs under the COMM B frequency window are used to dial COMM B
frequencies. The larger knob selects MHz and the smaller knob selects KHz. The transceiver
is inoperable in the two unused MHz positions between 118MHz and 135MHz. Clockwise rotation
selects higher frequencies. The dial mechanism has no stops, permitting continuous rotation.
Page 3-l
KING
KY 195B
COMMUNICATIONS TRANSCEIVER
VOLUME CONTROL
ON-OFF-TEST SWITCH
A-B SELECTOR CONTROL
3.3 POST-INSTALLATION
CHECKOUT
To check the communications transceiver, maintain an appropriate altitude and contact a ground
station facility at a range of at least fifty nautical miles. Contact a ground station close in.
Place the squelch knob in the test position and listen for any unusual electrical noise which would
reduce the COMM receiver sensitivity by increasing the squelch threshold. If possible, verify
the communications capability on both the HIGH and LOW ends of the VHF COMM band.
I
i
I
i
Page 3-2
MAINTENANCE/OVERHAUL
MANUAL
KY 195B
COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSCEIVER
TABLEOFCONTENTS
SECTION
IV THEORY
OFOPERATION
ANDMAINTENANCE
Paragraph Page
4. 1 General 4-l
SECTION
V ILLUSTRATED
PARTSLIST
Item
1. KY 195B 5-1
2. Front Plate Sub-Assembly 5-l
3. Switching Head Sub-Assembly 5-l
4. COMM SMO Board Sub-Assembly 5-l
5. COMM SMO Sub-Assembly 5-l
6. NAV /COMM Board Sub-Assembly 5-l
7. Transmitter Board Sub-Assembly 5-l
8. Rear Plate Sub-Assembly 5-l
9. Audio Drive Board Sub-Assembly 5-l
10. Rear Divider Sub-Assembly 5-l
11. Connector & Cable Sub-Assembly 5-l
12. KA 39 Voltage Converter 5-l
13. Switching Matrix Sub-Assembly 5-2
LISTOF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
SECTIONIV
THEORY
OFOPERATION/MAINTENANCE
4.1 GENERAL
KY 195 unit incorporates a 720 channel communications transceiver, a 5 watt audio system, and
dual control heads. The transceiver and audio systems are identical to the respective portions of
the KX 175B. For theory and maintenance procedures on the COMM transceiver or audio system,
refer to the KX 175B text. Theory and maintenance of the dual control head mechanism appear in
this section.
4.2 DUALCONTROL
HEAD
Wafer switches in the KY 195B are identical to the COMM wafer switches used in the KX 175B.
Lever switch “A-B” applies either “A” or “B” channeling information to the SMO and “A” or “B”
tuning voltage to the varactor tuned filters in the COMM receiver preselector.
4.3 DUALCONTROL
HEAD-DETAILED
DESCRIPTION
Refer to Figure 5-31 in the KX 170B/KX 175B Maintenance Manual for the KY 195B Switching
Assembly Diagram.
The DPST switch (Sill) contacts are open and the “B” tuning voltage (red-blue wire) from switch
wafer S106 is disconnected from the COMM tuning voltage buss, Additionally, the common wire
to the “B” switch wafers (red-gray wire) assumes a voltage of approximately 8 volts, back bias-
ing the isolation diodes associated with the “B” wafer switches which effectively disconnects the
“B” switching circuitry from the COMM SMO. Transistors Q201-Q204 are saturated. Q204
shorts the common wire of the “A” switch wafers (brown-gray wire) to ground, activating the
“A” wafer switch functions. Q203 connects the negative side of the “A” tuning voltage divider on
switch wafer, S102, to ground while Q201 connects the positive side to +8. 5VDC providing a
current path through the tuning voltage divider. The “A” tuning voltage from switch wafer S102 is
connected directly to the COMM tuning voltage buss (red-blue wire) providing “A” tuning voltage
to the COMM receiver preselector.
The DPST switch (Sill) contacts are closed, connecting (a) the COMM tuning voltage from switch
wafer S106 to the tuning voltage buss (red-blue wire) and (b) the common wire of the “B” switch
wafers (red-gray wire) to ground. With the common wire on ground, the “B” channeling wafers
are activated and transistors Q201-Q204 are off. With Q203 and Q201 off, no current flows
through the “A” tuning voltage divider on switch wafer S102, isolating it from the COMM tuning
voltage buss (red-blue wire). With Q204 off, the “A” wafers and associated isolation diodes
represent an open circuit to the COMM SMO frequency selection circuitry.
4.4 TRDUBLESHDDTING
THE DUALCONTROL
HEAD
Refer to Figure 5-3 1 in the KX 170B/KX 175B Maintenance Manual for the KY 195B switching
matrix voltage measurements. See the KX 175B Manual for channeling malfunctions, refer to
Table 4-3 “COMM Programmable Counter Coding” and for COMM receiver preselector tuning
voltage versus channel frequency see Table 5-3 “COMM Channel-Receive SMO Frequency-Tuning
Voltage, ”
2. FRONT PLATE SUB-ASSEMBLY-See pages 6-4 thru 6-9 in KX 170B/KX 175B Maintenance
Manual.
4. COMM SMO BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY-See pages 6-32 thru 6-38. For schematic and
assembly drawing see page 5-69 of the Kx 170B/
KX 175B Maintenance Manual.
5. COMM SMO SUB-ASSEMBLY-See pages 6-39 thru 6-41 in KX 170B/KX 175B Maintenance
Manual.
8. REAR PLATE SUB-ASSEMBLY-See pages 6-54 thru 6-56 in Kx 170B/KX 175B Maintenance
Manual. For assembly drawing see page 6-60 in Kx 170A/
KX 175 Maintenance Manual.
9. AUDIO DRIVE BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY-See pages 6-57 thru 6-59 in KX 170B/KX 175B
Maintenance Manual. For schematic and assembly
drawing see page 5-67 in Kx 170B/KX 175B
Maintenance Manual.
10. REAR DIVIDER SUB-ASSEMBLY-See pages 6-60 thru 6-63 in m 170B/KX 175B
Maintenance Manual.
11. CONNECTOR & CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY-See pages 6-65 thru 6-67 in KX 170B/KX 175B
Maintenance Manual.
12. KA 39 VOLTAGE CONVERTER-See pages 6-71 thru 6-74 in KX 170A/KX 175 Maintenance
Manual.
SYMBOL
KING RADIO CORf? PARTS LISTING
PART NUMBER
= =
00
QUANTITY
= D
DESCRIPTION
-
009-0030-02 T ertiinal St rip 5
012-1006-00 Nyl Lacing Tape AF
025-0018-04 #26 Wire Blk/ Ye1 .3
025-0018-14 #26 Wire Brn/ Ye1 .3
025-0018-24 #26 Wire Red/ Ye1 .3
025-0018-34 #26 Wire Orn/ Ye1 .3
025-0018-44 #26 Wire Ye1 .5
025-0018-54 #26 Wire Grn/Yel .5
025-0018-56 #26 Wire Grn/Blu 1. (
025-0018-64 #26 Wire Blu/Yel .4
025-0018-74 #26 Wire Viol Ye1 .4
025-0018-84 #26 Wire Gry/Yel .4
026-0001-00 #26 Buss Wire .2
047-2362-02 Chassis SW Matrix 1
076-0339-00 Spacer 1
089-2076-30 Nut 4-40 5
089-5878-05 Scr 4-40 x 5116 PHP 1
089-8003-34 Washer S/L 5
150-0003-10 Tubing Tef #24 AWG .2
Q201
Q202
007-0238-00
007’-0078-00
Tstr
Tstr
FPN4917
2N3415
1
1
B
Q203 007-0078-00 Tstr 2N3415 1
Q204 007-0078-00 Tstr 2N3415 1
CR201 007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR202 007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR.203 007-6033-00 Diode 11\T2 73 1
CR.204 007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR205 007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR206 007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR207 :007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR208 007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR.209 007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR210 007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR.211 007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR212 007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR213 007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR214 007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR215 007-6033-00 Diode lN2 70 1
CR216 007-6033-00 Diode lN2 70 1
CR217 007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
007-6033-00 Diode lN270 1
CR218
CR219
CR220
007-6033-00
007-6033-00
Diode
Diode
lN270
lN270
1
1
B
c - -
0 0202 Cl204 0 0
-009-0030-02 (5)
026-0001-00~
150-0003-10
047-23x-02-
076-0339-00
089.5878-05c 089-2076-30(51
(SCREW FARSIDEI
~089-6003-34~51
KX 170BE
1. 1 This section contains information relative to the King Radio Corporation KX 170BE
Communications Transceiver/Navigation Receiver. The KX 170BE is identical to the
KX 170B with the exception of the Communication Transceiver Selectivity.
Refer to the KX 170B text and the changes listed below to completely specify the KX 170BE.
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
C483
------
l 1 IOOpf
: FL403 ] *
It--
Page l-l
KlNG
KX 175BE
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATION TRANSCEIVER
KX 175BE
1. 1 This section contains information relative to the King Radio Corporation KX 175BE
Communications Transceiver/Navigation Receiver. The KX 170BE is identical to the
Kx 175B with the exception of the Communication Transceiver Selectivity.
Refer to the KX 175B text and the changes listed below to completely specify the KX 175BE.
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
C483
IOOpf
a *
T >I--
L-J FC471----
E = 2.7Pf 1
I -I- i---!’ NC
:3-- 8LU
Page l-2
KlNG
KY 195 BE
COMMUNICATION TRANSCEIVER
KY195BE
1.1 This section contains information relative to the King Radio Corporation KY 195BE
Communications Transceiver. The KY 195BE is identical to the KY 195B with the
exception of Transceiver Selectivity.
Refer to the KY 195B test and the changes listed below to completely specify the KY 195BE.
C483
IOOpf
i- i T415
f 3- - 8LU
=
Page l-3
KX 1756
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
COMMUNICATION TRANSCEIVER
KX 1758
(069-1019-05)
1.1 This section contains information relative to the King Radio Corporation KX 1756 (069-1019-05)
Communication Transceiver/Navigation Receiver. The KX 1756 (069-1019-05) is identical to the
KX 1758 (069-1019-00) with the exception of the Communication Transceiver selectivity which
meets both RTCA 00-156, class C and D, and RTCA DO-109 receiver selectivity requirements.
Refer to the KX 1758 text and the changes listed below to completely specify the KX 175B
(069-1019-05).
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
1.3 Page l-9, Section 1.6, Units and Accessories Supplied should read:
Repetitively peak the two inductors cn FL408 until no further improvements are noted.
(no load used)
1.5 Page 5-63A, Figure 5-26A NAV/COMM Reseiver Schematic and Aseembly
Sheet 1 of 2
KING
KX 1758
NAVIGATION RECEIVER/
as follows:
l ,
=
I
J FL408
I
1.6 Pages 6-33 through 6-35, Comm. Smo. Bd. Sub-Ass'y should read:
Sheet 2 of 2
KlNG
KY 1958
COMMUNICATION TRANSCEIVER
KY 1958
(069-1021-04)
1.1 This section contains information relative to the King Radio Coroporation KY 195B (069-1021-04)
Communications Transceiver. The KY 1958 (069-1021-04) is identical to the KY 1958 (069-1021-00)
with the exception of the Communication Transceiver selectivity which meets both RTCA DO-156 Class
C and D, and RTCA DO-109 receiver selectivity requirements.
Refer to the KY 1958 text and the changes listed below to completely specify the KY 1958
(069-1021-04).
1.2 Page l-3, Section 1.5 Technical Characteristics should read as follows:
SPECIFICATION CHARACTERISTIC
1.3 Page 1-4, Section 1.6 Units and Accessories Supplied should read:
Repetitively peak the two inductors on FL408 until no further improvements are noted.
(no load used)
1.5 Page 5-63A, Figure 5-26A NAV/COMM Receiver Schematic and Assembly
091-0289-00
(INSULATOR)
Sheet 1 of 2
KING
KY 1958
COMMUNICATION TRANSCEIVER
I
1 ' FL408
I
1.6 Pages 6-33 through 6-35, Cornm. Smo. Bd. Sub-Asf'y should read:
1
C366
I
118-0031-00
I
Cap, Cer, 56pf N5600
I
1
I
0
1.1 Pages 6-42 through 6-47 NAV/COMM Ed. Sub-Ass'y.
Delete, add or change the lines as shown below:
Sheet 2 of 2